JP2022019221A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can accurately and easily attach an outer rail while increasing player's motivation to play.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a game board (game board unit 8, game plate 8b, rail base 700) that forms a game area, and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board. In the outer rail 600, a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 for guiding the mounting position to the game board are formed. In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from a start end (PS) to a left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a first range (H1), the range from the left end (PL) to an upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to a terminal end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as a third range (H3), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is larger in the first range (H1) (3, for example) than in the second range (H2) (2, for example), and larger in the second range (H2) than the third range (H3) (0, for example).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 86

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Patent Document 1 describes a gaming machine having a game property of a so-called type 1 type 2 type mixer.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-208334

In recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of accurately and easily attaching an outer rail while improving the player's motivation to play.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately and easily attaching an outer rail while improving a player's motivation to play.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above-mentioned problems. The following solutions and the wording in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solutions can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can also be made into a higher conceptual by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solving means has a lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element related to a predetermined lottery, a lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery element, and the predetermined lottery using the lottery element. If the state of the lottery execution means for executing the above, the state transition means capable of shifting from the first state to the second state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the state of the lottery element storage means are special states, the above-mentioned It is a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means that enables a common effect to be executed in the first state and the second state.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) Acquire lottery elements (special symbol jackpot random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) related to a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery).
(2) A lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery element of the above (1) is provided. The lottery elements can be stored, for example, up to a predetermined upper limit (up to 4 or 1 per symbol).
(3) A predetermined lottery is executed using the lottery element of (2) above.

(4) When the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied (when the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortening state is applicable, or when the winning symbol that shifts to the high probability state is applicable), the transition from the first state to the second state is possible. (It is possible to shift to an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state).

The first state (normal state) is preferably a state in which predetermined conditions are applied to the game.
Further, the second state (advantageous state) is preferably a state in which more advantageous conditions than predetermined conditions are applied. The second state is at least one of a high probability state (a state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high) or a time shortening state (a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, an electric chew support state, etc.). It is preferable that the state includes one state.

(5) If the lottery element storage means of the above (2) is in a special state (if the storage state of the lottery element is in a special state, the number of storages related to the second special symbol is a specified number or more (for example, 1 or more)). If), a common effect (effect with common contents) can be executed in the first state and the second state.
The common effect is preferably a mode in which the same background image is used. The reason for this is that even after the second state ends, it is possible to give the player a strong impression that the mode being executed in the second state continues.
The common effect may be a completely common effect, or may be an effect in which at least some elements (for example, a background image, a mode, a stage, a BGM, a character appearing, etc.) are common.

According to the present solution, if the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, a common effect can be executed in the first state and the second state, so that the gaming state is changed from the second state to the first state. Even if it shifts to, it is possible to give the player the impression that the second state is continuing. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

Solution 2: In any of the above-mentioned solutions, the gaming machine of the present solution means that the effect executing means has the first state and the first state unless the state of the lottery element storage means is the special state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that non-common effects can be executed in two states.

In the present solution, if the state of the lottery element storage means is not a special state (if the number of storages related to the second special symbol is less than the specified number (for example, 0)), the first state and the second state are non-existent. Enables common production (production with different contents) to be executed.

According to the present solution, the common effect is executed or the non-common effect is executed depending on the state of the lottery element storage means. Therefore, the player who wants to execute the common effect is stored in the memory. It can give you an incentive to save. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution means has a lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element related to a predetermined lottery, a lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery element, and the predetermined lottery using the lottery element. If the state of the lottery execution means for executing the above, the state transition means capable of shifting from the first state to the second state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the state of the lottery element storage means are special states, the above-mentioned The outer rail is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a common effect in the first state and the second state, a game board forming a game area, and an outer rail provided on the game board. A plurality of predetermined guide portions for guiding the attachment position to the game board are formed, and in a state where the outer rail is provided on the game board, the range from the start end to the left end of the outer rail is the first. Assuming that the range is the range from the left end to the upper end of the outer rail as the second range and the range from the upper end to the end of the outer rail as the third range, the number of the predetermined guide portions is the first. The game machine is characterized in that the range of the above is larger than that of the second range, and the range of the second range is larger than that of the third range.

According to the present solution, a large number of predetermined guide portions are arranged on the ball launcher side where the impact received from the game ball is large and the arrangement of the outer rail is particularly required to be accurate, and the outer rail on the ball launcher side is arranged. It is possible to reliably prevent displacement and vibration.
Further, according to the present solution, a predetermined guide portion is arranged on the terminal side of the outer rail, which has a small impact from the game ball and has little influence on the game, and the outer rail is processed or attached to the rail base. Can be facilitated.
Further, according to the present solution, the outer rail can be attached accurately and easily while improving the player's motivation to play.
In addition, the feature by the above-mentioned solution 2 can be added to this solution.
Then, according to each of the above-mentioned solutions, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately and easily attaching an outer rail while improving a player's motivation to play.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a figure which shows the detail of the 2nd variable winning apparatus 31. It is a front view which shows the part of a game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the 1st procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process in preparation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows the list of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern in the case where the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the non-time shortening state, and the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern in the case where the fluctuation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot from the time shortening state, and the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table by a symbol at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of passing a specific area. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st big prize opening opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time reduction state. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when the 1st special symbol fluctuates in the animal mode in a non-time reduction state. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (3/3). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role middle production performed during a big hit game (1/2). It is a continuous figure partially showing an example of a big role middle production performed during a big hit game (2/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a drive mode (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (1/2). It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in a non-time shortening state (2/2). It is a figure which shows the outline of the drive mode. It is a figure which shows the effect example at the time of execution of the deviation variation of the 1st special symbol in a memory digestion section. It is a figure which shows the difference between the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in a memory digestion section, and the variation pattern of the 1st special symbol selected in an immediate stop prevention section. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game regarding a game state and a launch direction. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the working memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a mode effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the effect symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of a variable winning apparatus operation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of a big hit variable prize device operation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the time saving medium and the pseudo time saving medium and other effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a drum unit production management process. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special fluctuation pattern of the measures against immediate termination of a consecutive villa state. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the special fluctuation pattern considering irregular hitting. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the game board unit of another embodiment independently. It is the schematic which shows the cross-sectional view of AA of FIG. 79. It is a figure which shows the outer rail. It is a figure which shows the game board, the outer rail and the rail base. It is a figure which shows the state which a game ball comes into contact with an outer rail. It is a figure which shows the outer rail and the game board.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of balls. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

[Overall configuration of gaming machines]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-mentioned inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is given as an example of a model connected to the card unit, but may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the grip unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit (without reference numeral).

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 is, for example, a form in which a push-in type circular button and a rotary joggling (jog dial) are combined around the push-type circular button. The player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or for example, some effect (for example, during a pattern change or a big hit game). It is possible to generate a notice effect, a probable change promotion effect, a promotion effect during a major role, etc.).

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed. The electronic devices will be described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 7).

The above-mentioned payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge portion (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Structure of board]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed. Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is located in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. A starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 25, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a (so-called right-handed area). Has been done.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow, enters (wins) the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, or opens. The ball enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. The game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 25, enters the variable start winning device 28 during the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation. There is a possibility that the ball may enter the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. The game balls that have entered the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are the game boards (combining the game board unit 8). It is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a plate material, a transparent plate, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hit manner), and accordingly, the right starting winning opening 28b is entered. Enables a ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 3, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with their tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the right starting winning opening 28b (the game ball enters the ball). There is no gap that can be created). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is expanded to the left and right to open the right start winning opening 28b. During this period, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can be entered, and the right starting winning opening 28b can be generated (variable starting winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28a also functions as a member for guiding the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning opening 28b. Further, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not always enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b) at the time of opening operation, and the winning ball occurs randomly.

Further, the variable start winning device 28 is a predetermined condition that is difficult to be satisfied in the non-time shortened state (predetermined gaming state), and is more likely to be satisfied in the time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) than in the non-time shortened state. If the operating condition (the condition that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode and the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time) is not satisfied, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the right start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the state shifts to an easy entry state in which the game ball can easily enter the right starting winning opening 28b rather than the difficult entry state. The variable start winning device 28 short-opens (opens for 0.1 seconds) when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode in the non-time shortened state, and stops and displays the normal symbol in the winning mode in the time shortened state. If it is done, it will be opened for a long time (open for 1.0 to 6.0 seconds).

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, or when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game). , It is possible to enter the ball into the first large winning opening 30b (special electric accessory, special winning event generating means). The first variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b at this time (the first large winning opening 30b is closed). Is. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to collapse to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the game ball can flow in, and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b. The arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically a mode that does not extremely obstruct the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (the first large winning opening 30b at the time of operation). However, the game ball does not always enter the first variable winning device 30 at the time of operation, and the winning balls occur randomly.

The second variable winning device 31 operates when a special condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit), and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed). Special electric accessory, second special prize event generation means). The second variable winning device 31 may be operated when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged on the right side of the effect unit 40, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The first variable winning device 30 described above employs a device (single-bladed tulip-type attacker) in which the opening / closing member 30a collapses to the right, whereas the second variable winning device 31 has an opening / closing member 31a. A type of device that slides inside the board is used (sliding attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

[Specific area]
Further, a specific area 31x is provided inside the second variable winning device 31. The specific area 31x is an area in which the game ball is difficult to pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the specific area slide member 31c is in the open state when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. This is the area where the game ball can pass when it is pulled into the inside of the board. The details of the second variable winning device 31 will be described later.

Further, although not particularly shown, the second variable winning device 31 (opening / closing member 31a) may be formed with a game ball rolling speed reducing portion that reduces the rolling speed of the game ball. The game ball rolling speed reduction portion makes the inclination of the opening / closing member 31a gentle, or forms alternating protrusions for advancing the game ball in a zigzag position at a position on the opening / closing member 31a through which the game ball passes. It can be realized. As a result, many game balls can be entered into the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game.

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 25, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), the second variable winning device 31 ( All the game balls driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 31b, the specific area), are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

4 and 5 are views showing the details of the second variable winning device 31.
In the second variable winning device 31, the second large winning opening 31b is arranged below the slide-type opening / closing member 31a. The inside of the second prize opening 31b has a downward slope to the left, and a passage extends downward at the left end. A second count switch 85 is arranged in the passage extending downward, and the second count switch 85 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31.

Then, the passage extending downward is divided into two routes beyond that. One first passage 31d extends downward as it is, and the other second passage 31e branches to the left side.
A slide member 31c for a specific area is arranged in the first passage 31d, and a specific area 31x is arranged downstream of the first passage 31d. A specific area switch (not shown) is arranged inside the specific area 31x.
On the other hand, no special member is arranged in the second passage 31e, and the discharge hole 31y is arranged downstream of the second passage 31e.

The slide member 31c for a specific area operates when a special condition is satisfied (after the lapse of the first time and before the lapse of the second time after the operation of the second variable winning device 31), and the slide member 31c for the specific area is moved to the specific area 31x. Allows the passage of game balls. The slide member 31c for a specific region slides along the front-rear direction of the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using, for example, a specific region solenoid (not shown). For example, after the lapse of the first time, 0.2 seconds have passed since the second variable winning device 31 was activated, and after the lapse of the second time, 1.8 seconds after the second variable winning device 31 was activated. After the lapse of time.

When the specific region solenoid is in the OFF state, the slide member 31c for the specific region blocks the first passage 31d, so that it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific region 31x. On the other hand, when the specific region solenoid is turned on, the slide member 31c for the specific region is pulled inside the board surface, so that the game ball can easily pass through the specific region 31x.

Next, the operation of the second variable winning device 31 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4A, the slide-type opening / closing member 31a is pulled inside the board surface, and the game ball enters the second large winning opening 31b. In the illustrated example, four game balls are advancing toward the second prize opening 31b. Here, it is a state immediately before the first game ball is detected by the second count switch 85.

As shown in FIG. 4B, the first game ball has reached the slide member 31c for a specific area. The second and third game balls are advancing toward the second count switch 85. The fourth game ball is about to enter the second big winning opening 31b.

As shown in FIG. 4 (C), at this time, the slide member 31c for a specific area is not pulled inward (because it is not operating), so that the first game ball is a slide for a specific area. The traveling direction is changed to the left side by the member 31c, and the traveling passage 31e is advanced. In this case, the first game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

As shown in FIG. 5 (D), it is assumed that the slide member 31c for a specific region is pulled inside the board surface at this point (during operation). In this case, the second game ball passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for a specific area and proceeds to the first passage 31d. Then, the second game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (E), the third game ball also passes through the front side of the slide member 31c for the specific region and proceeds to the first passage 31d. In this case, the third game ball passes through the specific area 31x and is detected by the specific area switch.

As shown in FIG. 5 (F), it is assumed that the operation of the slide member 31c for the specific area is completed at this point, and the slide member 31c for the specific area protrudes to the front side of the board surface. In this case, the fourth game ball is guided to the left side by the slide member 31c for a specific area and advances to the second passage 31e. Then, the fourth game ball is collected by the discharge hole 31y.

FIG. 6 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a).
The game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 (ordinary symbol display means) and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower right position in the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 (first special symbol display device 34). 1 symbol display means), a second special symbol display device 35 (second symbol display means), a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamp to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is lit, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. Display the individual, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a may be configured by using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol has not yet started to change at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display, for example, a change state and a stop state of the special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots) (symbol display means, first). Symbol display means, second symbol display means). In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers depending on a display mode including, for example, a combination of turning off or turning on or blinking two lamps (LEDs) (memory number display means). ). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp blinks. In the display mode in which two storage numbers are displayed and one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, three storage numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinking together, the storage number is displayed. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

On the other hand, the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a displays one storage number by, for example, a display mode composed of a combination of turning off or turning on one lamp (LED) (memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned off, the number of stored items is 0, and in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the above-mentioned middle start winning opening 26, the occurrence of the entry is memorized. The display mode changes to the display mode after decreasing by one each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger (up to 4 pieces). Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a shifts to the display mode after the increase in the sense that when the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28b), the ball has been entered. When the change (up to one) and the change of the special symbol is started triggered by the entry of the ball, the display mode is changed to the reduced display mode. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the first special symbol (first symbol) is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the display mode does not change. Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the variable start winning device 28 is in a state where the second special symbol (second symbol) can already start to fluctuate (when the stop is displayed). Even if the game ball enters the (right start winning opening 28b), the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (maximum 4 or maximum 1) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation storage lamps 34a and 35a has not yet started to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol at that time. It represents the number of times the ball has not entered.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, six LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation display lamp 38f, respectively. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation storage lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configurations of the game board: see Fig. 3]
The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed in the upper part of the inside of the effect unit 40, and the liquid crystal display 42 includes an effect symbol (this symbol) corresponding to a special symbol, a fourth symbol, and the like. Various production images are displayed, including a storage marker (holding display). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface (design of the cell board (not shown) and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

Further, a drum unit 200 is installed in the lower part inside the effect unit 40.
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203, and a pseudo effect symbol (7 symbols, a panda symbol, a cherry symbol, etc.) is displayed on each reel. For example, when seven symbols of the same color are displayed on the middle line, which is an effective line, it indicates that a big hit result has been obtained in the special symbol lottery. Each reel of the drum unit 200 is a movable body that can be moved at a plurality of moving speeds.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d is connected to the lower rolling stage 40e through the back side of the effect unit 40. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) (not shown) is attached to the inside of the upper center of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f (for example, a heart-shaped decoration) for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By such an effect using the movable body 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI that integrates semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning opening device 28 (right starting winning opening 28b). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the first variable winning device 30 (the first large winning opening 30b) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second variable winning device 31 (the second major winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

In addition, a specific area switch 83 is provided corresponding to the specific area 31x. A specific area switch 83 is provided at a position corresponding to the specific area 31x inside the second large winning opening 31b, and the specific area switch 83 detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the ordinary winning openings 22 and 25. Here, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used for all the ordinary winning opening 22 and 25 is given as an example. For example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the winning opening on the left side is installed. The switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the normal winning openings 22 and 25 located on the left side of the board, and the right winning opening switch 86 detects the winning of the game ball for the ordinary winning opening 25 located on the right side of the board. May be.

In any case, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal of these switches 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the winning detection signal and the passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, the specific area switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are It is transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and the panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and are integrated. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a first large winning opening solenoid corresponding to the specific area 31x, respectively. 90, the second prize opening solenoid 97 and the specific area solenoid 99 are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and are the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x, respectively. To open and close. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, the contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

The payout control device 92 is equipped on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (means for granting special benefits). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and causes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls to be executed. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the above-mentioned saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent out to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in one minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. do. In addition to this, a game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal board 118, and when the above card unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 has a built-in frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the card unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not inserted in the card unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display urging the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 has a built-in semiconductor memory such as ROM 128 and RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. It is processed to actually output sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, the LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illumination substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illumination substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is attached to the saucer illumination. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the speakers 54, 55 on the glass frame and the outer frame speaker 56. To output sound.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated board 136 to various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and the speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is transmitted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated board 136. Entered. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illuminated board is installed, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the saucer illuminated board. May be good. In addition, a panel illuminated board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel illuminated board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57, respectively, via the panel illuminated circuit board 138. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

[Drum unit]
Further, a drum unit 200 is connected to the effect control device 124.
The drum unit 200 includes a left reel 201, a middle reel 202, and a right reel 203 arranged coaxially.
The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 are each formed in an annular shape, and a reel band having a plurality of pseudo-effect symbols attached in a row at intervals is wound around the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203, respectively. .. The left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 have a rotation axis at the center thereof, and can be rotated or reversely rotated about the rotation axis.

Further, the drum unit 200 is provided with a stepping motor (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a motor) corresponding to each reel and a position detection mechanism (not shown) corresponding to each reel. The position detection mechanism may be arranged inside the stepping motor or may be arranged outside the stepping motor. The position detection mechanism can be configured by, for example, a light-shielding plate, a photo sensor, or the like.

The stepping motor is driven by a drum unit control device (driver, IC) (not shown) that controls the drum unit 200. The drum unit control device drives each reel according to the movable body data transmitted from the effect control device 124. Further, the drum unit control device transmits a detection signal to the effect control device 124 in response to the detection of the position (for example, the origin position) of each reel detected by the position detection mechanism.

Then, the effect control device 124 generates movable body data to be transmitted to the stepping motor corresponding to each reel based on the detection signal transmitted from the drum unit control device, and controls the operation of each reel.

The stepping motor is a motor that drives each reel (movable body) by alternately repeating 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation (1-2-phase excitation drive), and the stepping motor has four coils (coils 1 to 1 to 2). Coil 4) is included.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted, together with a display control CPU 146 which is a general-purpose central processing unit. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program for controlling the effect, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information about the effect (for example, an effect number) to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 into a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time), and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is individually based on the image data buffered here. Driven to.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the card unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160.

The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

8 and 9 are flowcharts showing an example of the first procedure of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector method interrupt mode (mode 2), and corrects the default RST method interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 now executes a reset standby process. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply cutoff detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system when, for example, the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the main control CPU 72 and the mask register are initially set in order to set the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to an input signal from a RAM clear switch (not shown), and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the thumb check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model specification command, a special symbol probability state specification command, an operation memory number increase effect command, an operation memory number decrease effect command, and a number of times cut) to the effect control device 124. Counter commands, special game status specification commands, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 determines the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. (Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the backed up PC register.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register, and also sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the program address of the backed up PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 9 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the grand prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and then the entire work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the thumb check buffer. Back up the contents of and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) excluding jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and hit determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols). Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 13), but the initial value of the loop counter (all) is updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 13), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 13). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the second procedure of the reset start process. Note that duplicate description will be omitted for the same processing as in the first procedure example of the reset start processing. Further, the process of FIG. 9 is the same in the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

The second procedure example of the reset start process is different from the first procedure example of the reset start process in that the preparatory process (step S112a) is added.

Specifically, if it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) in step S106, if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S107, or if it is determined to be negative (No) in step S108, the process under preparation (Step S112a) is executed.
The execution timing of the preparation process (step S112a) is not limited to such timing, and can be executed at any timing in the reset start process. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, it suffices to be controlled so as to shift from "preparing" to "playable state (shifted to the main loop)".

Step S112a: In the preparation process, the main control CPU 72 controls various operations required when clearing the RAM. The details of the processing will be described later.
Then, when the preparatory process (step S112a) is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes the RAM clear process (step S113). The subsequent processing is the same as the processing of the first procedure example.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process under preparation.
Step S125: The main control CPU 72 executes the preparation operation control process. Details of the operation control process during preparation will be described later.

Step S126: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch is operated (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the reset start process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch is operated (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S125.
By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can continue to execute the preparatory operation control process in step S125 until the RAM clear switch is pressed.

[Preparing operation control process]
The details of the operation contents of the operation control process under preparation are as follows.
In the preparation operation control process, the main control CPU 72 can execute the process of the content adopting at least one state and operation among the states and operation contents shown below.

(1) During preparation, the state shifts when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed. During preparation, stay until the RAM clear switch is pressed again. When the RAM clear switch is pressed in the "preparing" state, the game shifts to the "playable state".

(2) During preparation, the movable body (movable body connected to the main control device 70) managed by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is movably controlled, and whether or not the movable body operates normally. You can check the movement.
Specifically, a special electric accessory (attacker), a movable body inside the special electric accessory (a movable body that opens a probable change area or a specific area, a rotating body that constantly rotates in the case of a two-type system, and a specified trigger. (Movable bodies that can be moved by means of, and the mechanisms, solenoids, motors, etc. that accompany them), and ordinary electric accessories (electric tulips) are movably controlled by a constant operation.
The movable control is executed, for example, by operating a solenoid or a motor by a movable pattern in which "0.4 seconds ON → 0.4 seconds OFF" is repeated a plurality of times.
The movable control may be continuously executed from the beginning to the end during preparation, or may be executed up to a predetermined number of times or a predetermined time.

(3) During preparation, it can be clearly understood from the outside that preparation is in progress. In this case, for example, information such as "preparing", "cannot play", "finished when the RAM clear switch is pressed", "change the effect setting by pressing the effect button", etc. can be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display. can. In this case, the voice output such as "Preparing" may be repeatedly executed.

(4) During preparation, the setting related to the effect may be changed by operating the effect button. For example, when the effect switching button (effect button) is pressed, the display screen of the liquid crystal display is switched, and the date and time setting, volume setting (1 to 5 levels), effect frequency setting (1 to 3 levels), effect type setting, etc. are selected. Can be done.

(5) During the preparation, the launch control of the game ball may be disabled. This is because the launch control board 108 can launch a game ball on condition that the "launch permission signal" is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the payout control device 92. The main control device 70 can perform a process of transmitting a "launch permission signal" in the "interruption management process (timer interrupt process)", but the "interruption management process (timer interrupt process)" is being performed during preparation. Since it is a period that has not been executed yet, it will be in a state where it cannot be fired.

(6) The program for processing during preparation (program for operating various movable bodies) can be implemented (arranged) in the used area. The used area is an area in which the capacity that can be used for controlling the progress of the game is defined by the game machine rules, and the area outside the area is an area that is not included in the calculation of the usable capacity.

(7) During the period of preparation, external information indicating that preparation may be made may be output to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.).

(8) Preparation is in the stage before shifting to the main loop (before the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) is executed). Therefore, during the preparation, the display (main segment) of the integrated display board 89 can be turned off. Further, during the preparation, it is possible not to determine an error that can be determined during the playable state (for example, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, a large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.). Furthermore, during the preparation, it is possible to prevent the payout of prize balls, the fluctuation of special symbols, and the fluctuation of ordinary symbols.

(9) When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed, a command indicating "preparing" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. Further, when the RAM clear switch is pressed again and the preparation is completed, a command indicating "preparation finished" can be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device. In this case, the command may be transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device before shifting to the main loop.
At the stage of preparation, the RAM clear process is not executed, and the RAM clear process can be executed on condition that the RAM clear switch is pressed during the preparation. However, after executing the RAM clear process, the process may be performed during preparation, and then the process may be performed to move to the main loop.

The background to adopting such a configuration has the following problems.
With conventional gaming machines, the operation of special electric and ordinary electric machines cannot be checked at any time (especially when the power is turned on when clearing the RAM), so problems suddenly occur during normal games. It may be discovered.

Then, by adopting the above configuration, the following effects can be exhibited.
(1) Since it is possible to confirm whether or not various electric accessories can be operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the problem that various electric accessories do not operate during the game and to play the game normally.
(2) Since the game can be played normally, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.
(3) Since the defect can be solved in advance (before the game), the confirmation process of the defect during the game can be eliminated, and it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load on the control.
(4) Since the effect setting can be executed during preparation (operation check), efficient game can be provided.

The following technical contents can be extracted from the above configuration.
(1) When the power is turned on while the predetermined operating member (RAM clear switch), the movable body (electric accessory, drive source, solenoid, motor, etc.) and the predetermined operating member are being operated. It is a gaming machine provided with a movable body operating means for operating the movable body in a constant motion pattern in order to confirm whether or not the movable body operates normally.
(2) In the configuration of (1) above, it is preferable that the movable body operating means continues to operate the movable body in a constant operation pattern until a predetermined operating member is operated again.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply cutoff detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply cutoff detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply cutoff detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and its voltage level is set. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power cutoff detection signal is output. The main power supply cutoff detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this point (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power cutoff detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the test signal terminal and the output port buffer corresponding to the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the grand prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the thumb check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processing in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 8).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above.

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the winning opening switch 86, and the specific area switch 83. Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the specific area switch 83. The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the passage detection signal from the player, and another process is executed according to the event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 has an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery trigger, first lottery trigger, second lottery trigger) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes the process corresponding to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later using yet another flowchart.

Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or controls the execution of the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol. 2 The variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (ordinary symbol lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol is varied and displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. Exciting to operate the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a mode of deviation after the fluctuation display.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, a prize ball instruction for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Output the command.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the starting port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the starting port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are satisfied, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port) to the hall computer (external device) of the amusement park through the external terminal board 160. Information etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a device or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time, and even if they are not won. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). And store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the above-mentioned special symbol game processing (step S205) or normal symbol game processing (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, or the like is performed).

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes an output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a drive signal and a test signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the specific area solenoid 99 stored in the port output request buffer. Etc. and output to the port.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to the port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In this embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215 and S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer). In the interruption management process, the main control CPU 72 determines various errors (magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, large winning opening illegal winning error, etc.) based on sensors and switches (not shown) that detect various errors. can do.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 13). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game (during the small hit game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S24. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S24: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol storage update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current normal symbol operating storage number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol. do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation storage number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the specific area switch 83 corresponding to the specific area 31x in the second special winning opening 31b. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute a process of turning on the specific area preliminary flag. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 13).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (set number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into five sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number are in each section. Can be stored as a set (set) one by one. However, only four sections can be used for the first special symbol, and only one section can be used for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if four sections are already used for the first special symbol, each random number of the first special symbol is not stored any more. Similarly, even if there is a vacancy in the section, if one section is already used for the second special symbol, each random number of the second special symbol is not stored any more. The reason why there are five sections is that a total number of sections is required, which is the sum of the maximum storage number (4) of the first special symbol and the maximum storage number (1) of the second special symbol. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation storage number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value thereof. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, means for acquiring the lottery element). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random number values relating to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, means for acquiring lottery elements). Similarly, the acquisition of these random numbers is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. These random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (first lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fifth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fifth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fifth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. This determination is made in the present embodiment because the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: When the case is not during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the special symbol lottery and the fluctuation time are set in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively. This is for determining the content of the production (so-called "look-ahead"). In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the first special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command (look-ahead information).

Step S38: When the acquisition-time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower bytes of the special figure destination determination effect command (information on whether or not the command is correct or information on the fluctuation time) are set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper bytes are combined with the lower bytes here. By doing so, for example, a command with a length of one word will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the working memory number this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the working memory number "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it increases by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", respectively, and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory number increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (. Memory count notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation storages has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 1) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation storage number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 15), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, means for acquiring the lottery element). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76 (lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, lottery element). Acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and these are transferred to the random number storage area. Random numbers are stored as a set in an empty section in the area (second lottery element storage means, lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol (look-ahead process execution means). In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judgment. In this process, the result of the pre-determination of the second special symbol is set in the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command.

Step S47: When the acquisition time effect determination process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (look-ahead processing execution means). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word length is obtained by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte. Command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the increased operating memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, regarding the second special symbol, a special figure destination determination effect command, an operation memory number increase effect command, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 15, step S46 in FIG. 16) (preliminary determination). Means, look-ahead processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process relating to the first special symbol or the process relating to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command (look-ahead information) for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-shortening variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not activated (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, in the determination of step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and it is determined from the result which winning symbol corresponds to. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S78.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "00H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol that does not shift to the time reduction state", and "01H" is set if it corresponds to "a symbol that shifts to the time reduction state". .. In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means, look-ahead processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game process includes execution selection process (step S1000), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), special symbol change process (step S3000), special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and variable winning device management process. (Step S5000) is a configuration including a group of subroutines (program modules). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol change preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the change display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit or small hit mode (a mode other than the non-winning mode) in the previous special symbol stop display process. The big hit game or the small hit game is started according to the mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Big hit game]
For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 10-round jackpot, a jackpot game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the first large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 10 times in total, these may be collectively referred to as "10 rounds". In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the 10-round jackpot. As the type of jackpot, not only the 10-round jackpot but also other jackpots of the number of rounds may be provided.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the opening / closing of the first variable winning device 30 for one round. The value of the round count counter is incremented by 1 each time the operation is terminated. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (time shortened state) after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (time shortening function operation flag) (time shortening state transition means, state transition means). .. In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the lottery probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is set from the normal probability (low probability) to the high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the variable start prize is won. The opening time of the device 28 is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that a gaming machine including elements of a so-called two-kind gaming machine (for example, a one-kind two-kind mixer or a two-kind gaming machine, that is, a big hit game is executed by passing a game ball through a specific area during a small hit game. In the gaming machine), the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery may not be shifted to the high probability state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol operation lottery is a constant probability (for example, approximately 1/1) regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated, and the open pattern of the variable start winning device 28 makes it easy to win. Difficulty can be adjusted.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, the small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, a small hit game (a special game advantageous to the player) is executed. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the second large winning opening solenoid 97 operates for a certain period of time (for example, for 1.8 seconds or until 10 winnings are counted) for a preset number of operations (for example, once or multiple times). Excited, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (operation of a special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to acquire a certain amount of prize balls (special game execution means).

Further, in the variable winning device management process during the small hit game, the specific region solenoid 99 is excited for a certain period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) for a preset number of operations (for example, once), thereby for the specific region. The slide member 31c opens and closes in a fixed pattern. By passing the game ball through the specific area 31x during this period, the player is given an opportunity to start the big hit game. That is, whether or not the big hit game is started in the variable winning device management process is determined by whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game. In the present embodiment, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided in the small hit, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, the big hit game according to the winning type is started.

Further, even if the small hit game ends without the game ball passing through the specific area 31x, the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state" is not given (hence). It is not a prerequisite for.). If a small hit is won in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction state" may be terminated after the small hit game is completed.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, "10 round big hits 1 to 6" are provided as a plurality of winning types. "10 round big hits 1 to 4" is started when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and "10 round big hits 5 and 6" is stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode. It is started when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the hit game. When the big hit is executed by "10 round big hits 5 and 6" (when the big hit is executed via the small hit), the second variable winning device 31 operates in the first round, and the first round in the remaining rounds. The variable winning device 30 operates.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "10 round jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "1st winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "2nd winning symbol". Further, "10 round jackpot 3" corresponds to the jackpot of the "third winning symbol", and "10 round jackpot 4" corresponds to the jackpot of the "fourth winning symbol". Furthermore, "10 round big hit 5" corresponds to a small hit of "5th winning symbol" (big hit when passing through a specific area 31x), and "10 round big hit 6" corresponds to a small hit of "6th winning symbol" (specific area). It corresponds to the big hit when passing 31x). Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[1st winning symbol]
In the process of displaying the stop of the special symbol, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "first winning symbol", the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "first winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. Further, when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round, the first large winning opening 30b is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time (hereinafter, the same applies). .. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[2nd winning symbol]
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "second winning symbol" in the processing during the special symbol stop display, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "second winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time reduction function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[Third winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "third winning symbol" in the processing during the special symbol stop display, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "third winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[4th winning symbol]
When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fourth winning symbol" in the processing during the special symbol stop display, the big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, the big hit game of the "fourth winning symbol" is a big hit game in which 10 rounds of balls (prize balls) can be given to the player. In this case, the "time reduction function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

[Fifth winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "fifth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game in the case of falling under the "fifth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the "time reduction state" (time reduction number = 1 time or 10 times).

[6th winning symbol]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the "sixth winning symbol", the small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, It shifts from the small hit game state to the big hit game state. In this case, the first large winning opening 30b is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the second round, and this continues until the tenth round. Therefore, in the big hit game corresponding to the "sixth winning symbol", it is possible to give the player nine rounds of balls (prize balls). In this case, the "time reduction function" does not operate after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol", the "third winning symbol" or the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, there is a possibility that the game shifts to the "time reduction state" after the big hit game is completed. ..

In this way, a small hit is won by an internal lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is executed, and after the big hit game is completed, the time is shortened according to the type of the winning symbol. The gaming machine is a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type gaming machine.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demo effect. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 in the order of acquisition. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. In the present embodiment, random numbers are read out in the order stored (acquired) in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 (winning order digestion). It should be noted that the control of priority digestion that prioritizes the digestion of the second special symbol may be used instead of the control of the winning order digestion for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13), the display mode of the stored number by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 19), the main control CPU 72. Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 refers to the random number storage area and confirms whether or not the oldest storage corresponds to the second special symbol. This confirmation can be realized by confirming whether or not the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the first section of the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if it is confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as the target special symbol. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the oldest memory corresponds to the second special symbol (step S2210: No), that is, when the oldest memory corresponds to the first special symbol, the main The control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the target special symbol. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target special symbol this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the target special symbol is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target special symbol is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command having a length of one word, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ") Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an added value (for example," 10H ") meaning" decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption ". Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit becomes "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target special symbol this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation storage number reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (storage number notification means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 19).

[See Fig. 19: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution). means). If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the above jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (first). Lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than a non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. The "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating only the second variable winning device 31 (the condition for operating the condition device is not satisfied). Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the "small hit", it is positioned to develop into a "big hit" (the condition for operating the condition device is satisfied). In any case, if the read random value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be made while comparing with the random number value.

In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the big hit is set to 1/319, and the winning of the small hit is not set. In the first special symbol lottery, a small hit may be won. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/319, and the probability of winning a small hit is set to 318/319 (= approximately 1/1), which corresponds to a loss. It is designed not to. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it may correspond to the loss. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit. In order to satisfy the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit, the range of the big hit value and the range of the small hit value are set by the main control CPU 72 and compared with the read random value.

Further, the main control CPU 72 has a second special symbol lottery opportunity (second lottery opportunity) that is less likely to occur than the first special symbol lottery opportunity (first lottery opportunity) in the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state). When is generated, the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) is executed (second lottery execution means).

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) based on the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 13).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be left, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to a variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) (not shown), and executes a variation pattern determination process at the time of loss (variation pattern determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as normal fluctuation (non-reach fluctuation), reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to big hits and small hits). It should be noted that the information regarding the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command including the information as to whether or not it is a special variation (the same applies to the case of a big hit or the time of a small hit). ).

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the above-mentioned "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction state". Check if it is in "state". Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the fluctuation for executing the reach effect is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display). 2 pieces → about 5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display 3 pieces → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of a big hit (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, four types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the first special symbol is "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol", and the breakdown of the second special symbol is "third winning symbol" or "fourth winning symbol". In addition, each winning symbol of these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "first winning symbol", "first winning symbol A", "first winning symbol B", "first winning symbol C", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "52" and "48" are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. Further, in the second column from the left, a "first winning symbol" and a "second winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "first winning symbol" is 52/100 (= 52%), and the ratio of selecting the "second winning symbol" is 100. It is 48 minutes (= 48%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the big hit symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Select the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H" and "02H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "first winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time reductions]
In the column on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "first winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is 1 (or 10 times) regardless of whether the time is normal (non-time reduction state) or time reduction (time reduction state). ) Granted.

In addition, in the case of falling under the "second winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving. The number of time reductions is not limited to the above value, and may be 2 times or more (11 times or more).

Here, "1 time (or 10 times)" means that when the total number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or the total number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 10. It means that the shortened state ends.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "100" corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. .. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "third winning symbol" and the "fourth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "third winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "fourth winning symbol" is 100. It is 50 minutes (= 50%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is specified as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is. Further, the EVENT value "01H" of the lower byte represents the type of the corresponding winning symbol in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and the "third winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time reductions]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "third winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of falling under the "fourth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

[See Fig. 19: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the jackpot variation pattern determination process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is the "first winning symbol" or the "third winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 is in the flag area of the RAM 76. The time reduction function operation flag as a certain game state flag is set to ON (01H) (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operation means, state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortening state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 changes from the non-time shortening state (first state) to the time shortening state (1st state). It is possible to shift to the second state) (state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of a small hit (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is defined in advance in the small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately. Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but is set only for the second special symbol.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In this embodiment, two types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a small hit. The breakdown of the two types is "5th winning symbol" and "6th winning symbol". In addition, these winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "fifth winning symbol", "fifth winning symbol A", "fifth winning symbol B", "fifth winning symbol C", and so on.

[Second special symbol stop symbol selection table at small hit]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Even in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and the distribution values "50" and "50" are when the denominator is 100. Corresponds to the ratio of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, the "fifth winning symbol" and the "sixth winning symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a small hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting the "fifth winning symbol" is 50/100 (= 50%), and the ratio of selecting the "sixth winning symbol". Is 50/100 (= 50%).

As a result of this small hit, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selectively determines the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table. In the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is specified as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is a small hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is a thing. Further, the EVENT values "03H" and "04H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when "fifth winning symbol" is selected as the winning symbol as a result of this small hit, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H03H".

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the small hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time reductions]
In the column on the right side of the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started, and the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is given. The value of is shown. In the present embodiment, when the "fifth winning symbol" is applicable, the number of time reductions is given once (or 10 times) regardless of whether it is during normal or time reduction.

In addition, in the case of falling under the "sixth winning symbol", the number of time reductions is given 0 times (not given) regardless of whether it is during normal or time saving.

By using the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, and the second special symbol small hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 is in a non-time shortened state or If the time is shortened and the "1st winning symbol", "3rd winning symbol" or "5th winning symbol" is applicable (the 5th winning symbol is limited to the case where the jackpot game is executed), the time is reached. It can be assumed that the transition condition to the shortened state is satisfied (transition condition setting means).

[See Fig. 19: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern selection table (variation pattern defining means) and executes the small hit time variation pattern determination process (variation pattern determining means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol lottery, and at the time of the small hit, a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time for the small hit is selected. A small hit may be set for the first special symbol lottery.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 18: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer is changed according to the passage of time (the count number of the clock pulse or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement the value of the counter. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the fluctuation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 19). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 clears the symbol changing flag.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the time saving function is not activated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the normal state (non-time reduction state) is entered.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and the value is simply off (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number update process. In this process, if the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are both 0, no process is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the first special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol is executed. Further, when the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 1 or more and the second special symbol is stopped, the process of decrementing (-1) the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed. The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol are reset at the start of the jackpot game. When this process is executed regardless of whether the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol or the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol is 0 or 1 or more, the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol. It is possible to send a special variation number designation command that reflects the value of the special variation number of the second special symbol and the special variation number of the second special symbol to the effect control device.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cut counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter value related to the "time reduction state" is set in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. In this embodiment, a so-called time reduction function for cutting the number of times is adopted, and when shifting to the "time reduction state", the first number of times cutting counter value (the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) regarding the time reduction state is adopted. The time reduction number of times is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10 times), and the second number of times cut counter value (time reduction number of times of the second special symbol) regarding the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once). The information of the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value is notified (transmitted) to the effect control device 124 by the count cut counter command.
It should be noted that the time reduction counter value related to the time reduction state is not provided with two counter values such as the first number cut counter value and the second number cut counter value, and the time reduction state is controlled by only one counter value. May be good.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value (first count cut counter value or second count cut counter value) is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the number-of-counts cut counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value. Specifically, when the stop display of the second special symbol is being displayed, both the first count cut counter value and the second count cut counter value are decremented, and when the stop display of the first special symbol is being displayed. Decrements only the first count cut counter value.

Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result of any of the number-cutting counter values (first number-cutting counter value or second number-cutting counter value) is 0. As a result of the subtraction, if none of the counter values for cutting the number of times is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when any of the number-cutting counter values is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, the number-of-times counter value related to the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, once or 10 times). When the second special symbol missed variation (including the small hit variation at that time when the specific area is not passed) is executed in the time shortened state, the time shortening function operation flag is reset. On the other hand, even if the first special symbol is displaced 9 times in the time shortened state, the time shortening function activation flag is not reset, and then once in the time shortened state, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed once. When the deviation fluctuation is executed, the time saving function activation flag is reset. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the stop display of the special symbol is performed. The time reduction function activation flag is described in the example of resetting when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed, but even if it is reset at the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (before the stop display time measurement starts). good.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

In this way, the end condition (predetermined end condition) of the time shortened state is when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after shifting to the time shortened state reaches the first number (for example, once), or. When the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the transition to the time reduction state, reaches the second number (for example, 10 times), which is larger than the first number. It is a condition to be satisfied.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a list of fluctuation pattern tables.
The variation pattern table includes seven variation pattern tables A to G.
The main control CPU 72 makes it possible to select any of the seven variation pattern tables A to G according to the gaming state. Each variation pattern table contains one or more variation patterns. For example, when the variation pattern table A is selected, the variation pattern selected may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This point is the same for other variation pattern tables. The "game state" in the figure indicates the game state (game state of the transition destination) after the end of the big hit game. However, the "game state" in the figure may be the game state before the start of the big hit game (the game state before the transition).

The variation pattern table A is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction (non-time reduction state)". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. Even after clearing the RAM, this table is selected.

The variation pattern table B is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state. The difference between the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation pattern table B is that the fluctuation pattern table B is a table that is selected within the specified number of fluctuations (for example, up to 30 fluctuations) after the time reduction state ends. .. The fluctuation pattern table B is a so-called immediate stop prevention table.

The variation pattern table C is selected when the gaming state is "with time reduction (time reduction state)". Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuates by 1 to 4, 6 to 9 at the time of winning a symbol with a time reduction in the normal state (when the "first winning symbol" or "third winning symbol" is won). Be selected. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 1 second) is set for the first special symbol, and a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol. Is set.

The variation pattern table D is selected when the gaming state is "with reduced working hours". Specifically, it is selected in the time saving state. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 90 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

The variation pattern table E is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected in the normal state (1 time remaining = when the change of one fluctuation of the second special symbol after the end of the time shortening state). In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 120 seconds) is set for the second special symbol.

The variation pattern table F is selected when the gaming state is "no time reduction". Specifically, it is selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern table B.

The variation pattern table G is selected when the gaming state is “with time reduction”. Specifically, it is selected when the first special symbol fluctuates by 5 or 10 when the symbol with a time reduction in the normal state is won. In this table, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of 13.5 seconds) is set for the first special symbol.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
Here, the "time reduction number" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the first number of times cut counter value (the total time reduction number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 28).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction number" is "10 times" and the "first special symbol special change number" is ". 10 times ".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 4" and "6 to 9", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "5" or "10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table G".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special change count" is ". 10 times ".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation number" is "20". "Times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game, the "number of time reductions" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a variation pattern in the case where the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the non-time shortened state.
In this embodiment, since a big hit or a small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, there is no special change table after the second change.
Here, the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" in the figure indicates a value to be set in the second number cut counter value (the time reduction number of only the second special symbol) (the same applies to FIG. 29).

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table C".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No5 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a variation pattern when the variation of the jackpot game is the first special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is the "first winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction number" is "10 times" and the "first special symbol special change number" is ". 10 times ".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation count" is "20". "Times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "time reduction count" is "10 times", and the "first special symbol special change count" is ". 10 times ".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number" is "0 times" and the "first special symbol special variation number" is "20". "Times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during a small hit game, the "number of time reductions" is "10 times". Therefore, the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "10 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 10", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "11" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0". "Times", and "Number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" becomes "0 times". , "The number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "20 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1 to 5", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "6 to 19", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table B".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "20", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table F".
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "21" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "time reduction number" is "0 times". , And the "number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1" or later, the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a variation pattern in the case where the variation after the jackpot game is the second special symbol in the jackpot from the time shortened state.
As in FIG. 27, in the present embodiment, the big hit or the small hit occurs when the second special symbol changes, so that there is no special change table after the second change.

[No1]
When the "winning symbol" is "1st winning symbol (1st special symbol, 10R, 1 time reduction)", "2nd special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and "2nd special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No2]
When the "winning symbol" is the "second winning symbol (first special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No3]
When the "winning symbol" is the "third winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)", the "second special symbol time reduction count" is "1 time", and the "second special symbol special". The "number of fluctuations" is "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No4]
When the "winning symbol" is the "fourth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)", the "time reduction number of the second special symbol" becomes "0 times", and the "special variation of the second special symbol". The "number of times" is "once".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No5 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" Is "1 time", and "the number of special fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol" is "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table D".

[No5 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "fifth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, one time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction" The "number of times" is "0 times", and the "number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

[No6 (passing a specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number" is It becomes "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" becomes "1 time".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table E".

[No6 (non-passing specific area)]
If the "winning symbol" is the "sixth winning symbol (second special symbol, 10R, no time reduction)" and the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game, the "second special symbol time reduction number of times" Is "0 times", and "the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol" is "0 times".

The variation pattern table referred to in this case is as follows.
When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit is "1", the reference fluctuation pattern table is "variation pattern table A".

By adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the variation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state ( (For example, 1 second) can be made relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (variation time determining means). ..

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). It is possible to make the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds) (for example, less than 120 seconds). Fluctuation time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol. The pattern table D) should be made relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern table C) when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the consecutive villa state. It is possible (means for determining variable time).

By adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state) and before the jackpot game is executed, the variation time of the first special symbol in the consecutive villa state ( The fluctuation time can be determined so that the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds or more and less than 120 seconds) of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state). Time determination means).

Further, by adopting such a variation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the consecutive villa state (second state), and after the jackpot game is executed, the second state of the consecutive villa state (second state). The fluctuation time is determined so that the fluctuation time of one special symbol (for example, 120 seconds or more) is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the non-time shortened state (first state) (for example, less than 120 seconds). It is possible (means for determining variable time).

Further, by adopting such a fluctuation pattern table, the main control CPU 72 wins in the second special symbol lottery (second lottery) and shifts to the continuous villa state, the fluctuation time (variation) of the first special symbol. The pattern table D) is made to be relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (variation pattern table C) when the first special symbol lottery (first lottery) is won and the state shifts to the consecutive villa state. The fluctuation time can be determined (variation time determination means).

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 13) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. It is a configuration including a subroutine group of the process (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special as already described. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the value of the time saving function operation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the time saving function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 is set to the time saving state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. A lighting signal is output to the corresponding LED. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation display lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big hit game or a small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f. Output. Further, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation display lamp 38f in addition to the time saving state display lamp 38e described above. Is output. The launch position designation display lamp 38f is lit from the start of the big hit game to the end of the "time reduction state" when shifting to the "time reduction state" after the big hit game, and is not lit by the end of the "time reduction state". (OFF).

The main control CPU 72 manages the firing position by the firing position designation flag (0 = left-handed state, 1 = right-handed state) indicating whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state, and specifies the firing position at an arbitrary timing. A launch position specification command including the contents of the flag can be sent to the effect control device. Here, when the right-handed notification lamp is connected to the effect control device, the effect control device can control the lighting mode of the right-handed notification lamp based on the firing position designation command. The non-time reduction state is a left-handed state, and the time reduction state is a right-handed state. During the big hit game and the small hit game, the player is basically right-handed, but may be left-handed during each ending time (during the end time).

The time shortened state can be ended at the end of the fluctuation (at the start of the stop display time) of the final fluctuation (missing fluctuation, small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation) in the time shortened state. In this case, the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time shortened state can be set to a time (15.0 seconds) longer than the stop display time (0.5 seconds) other than the final fluctuation. The time reduction state may be terminated at the end of the stop display time of the final fluctuation in the time reduction state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "10 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "10 rounds (10R)". Further, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, but as a jackpot other than the 10-round jackpot, for example, a 4-round jackpot exists, and the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "4 rounds". If so, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "4 rounds (4R)". When there is only one type of jackpot as a jackpot (when there is only a 10-round jackpot) as in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to turn on the jackpot type indicator lamp.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes the game process selection process (step S5100), the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300), the large winning opening closing process (step S5400), and the end. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern as the next jump destination (step). Select S5200). On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the large winning opening opening / closing operation process has been completed. Then, the large winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects the end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. .. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of a big hit or a small hit, respectively. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. As a result of this confirmation, when the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5203. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), that is, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5204.

Step S5203: The main control CPU 72 executes a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the winning symbol at the time of big hit is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process. In this process, the opening pattern of the large winning opening is set based on the opening pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of small hit. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5205.

Step S5205: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" is the first variable winning device 30 or the second. It is a device that can continuously operate the variable winning device 31. It should be noted that the "conditional device" and the "continuous operation device for accessories" can also be used as control flags. Therefore, unless this condition device is operating, the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 do not operate in the big hit game. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5212.

Step S5212: The main control CPU 72 sets "starting big role (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5214.

Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit, and selects an open pattern corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of execution rounds, the opening time, and the interval time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5216.

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of big hit]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol at the time of a big hit. This open pattern setting table for each big hit symbol defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 30 or second variable winning device 31) to be operated for each round for each different winning symbol related to the special symbol. Is. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[1st winning symbol]
When the first winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the first winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened (however, it is closed when the maximum number of winning balls is confirmed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Therefore, if it corresponds to the first winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[2nd winning symbol]
When the second winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the second winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the second winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[Third winning symbol]
When the third winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the third winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 from the first round to the tenth round is in each round for 29.0 seconds. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if the third winning symbol is applicable, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

[4th winning symbol]
When the fourth winning symbol is applicable, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10, and 10 of them are rounds with a ball. Then, in the round with a ball, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b per round is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol is the fourth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the first variable winning device 30 is set during each round for 29.0 seconds from the first round to the tenth round. It operates and the first big winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, if it corresponds to the 4th winning symbol, it is possible to obtain substantially 10 rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol by referring to the opening pattern setting table for each big hit symbol.

[Refer to Fig. 33: Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
Step S5216: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated for each round (1st round to the final round) during the big hit game to the 1st variable winning device 30 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. do. In this embodiment, since the opening pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (1st winning symbol to 3rd winning symbol) at the time of big hit is 1 round to the final round, the 1st big winning opening 30b is opened. The operation of the first variable winning device 30 is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5218.

Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol. For example, 10 rounds are set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the 10-land jackpot. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5220.

Step S5220: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each round when the big winning opening is opened at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for a round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5222.

Step S5222: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the interval timer of the open pattern corresponding to all the winning symbols (first winning symbol to third winning symbol) at the time of big hit. For example, after the opening of the first big winning opening 30b between the first round and the second round is completed and the first round is closed once, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5224.

Step S5224: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5218). For example, in the case of the first winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5252: The main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5254.

Step S5254: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit opening pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the small hit opening pattern setting table and selects an opening pattern. Here, the opening pattern represents a setting for operating the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, and represents, for example, a setting such as the number of times of opening, the opening time, the interval time, and the opening time of the specific area 31x. ing. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5256.

[Open pattern setting table for small hits]
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table at the time of a small hit. This small hit opening pattern setting table defines the opening / closing operation pattern of the variable winning device (second variable winning device 31). In this embodiment, one open pattern is set at the time of a small hit, but a plurality of open patterns may be specified for each winning symbol.

When it corresponds to a small hit, the variable winning device to be operated is the second variable winning device 31. Further, the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened is two, and the opening time of one time is 0.9 seconds. The interval time is set to, for example, about 1.0 second.

The opening start time of the specific region 31x (timing at which the specific region solenoid 99 is turned on to operate the slide member 31c for the specific region) is 0.2 seconds after the opening start of the second variable winning device 31.
Further, the opening end time of the specific area 31x (timing at which the specific area solenoid 99 is turned off to deactivate the slide member 31c for the specific area) is 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. ..

[Refer to Fig. 35: Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
Step S5256: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the second variable winning device 31. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the type of the variable winning device to be operated during the small hit game in the second variable winning device 31 based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5258.

Step S5258: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening to be executed during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, two times are set as the number of times the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit is opened. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5260.

Step S5260: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each opening of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, 0.9 seconds is set based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5262.

Step S5262: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit time interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between the openings of the large winning openings based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In this embodiment, the interval timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5264.

Step S5264: The main control CPU 72 sets an release timer for the specific area 31x (specific area slide member 31c). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) of the specific area 31x during the small hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In the present embodiment, the specific area 31x is opened 0.2 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31, and the specific area 31x is closed 1.8 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 31. Will be done.

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (FIG. 32).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current internal state is “in a big role”. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer of the RAM 76, and the current internal state is "" depending on whether or not the "big win (big hit game)" flag is set as the internal state flag for control. Check if it is a big role. In addition, the flag of "during big win (during big hit game)" is set by the main control CPU 72 during the previous processing (during the process of setting the big winning opening pattern at the time of big hit: step S5212) and during the processing when passing through a specific area described later. .. As a result of this confirmation, when the current internal state is "Major role" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5306. On the other hand, when the current internal state is not "Major role" (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the second prize opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the second variable winning device 31 in order to open and close the second winning opening 31b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the second winning opening solenoid 97). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S5306: The main control CPU 72 executes the first large winning opening opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the first variable winning device 30 in order to open and close the first winning opening 30b based on the set opening pattern (applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90). (Output the drive signal) processing is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 31).

[2nd prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second prize opening opening / closing operation process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5310: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b by the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a small hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a small hit is transmitted only once during the small hit.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the release timer set in the previous process (step S5260 or step S5264 in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). In this process, in addition to the opening timer for opening the second special winning opening 31b, a countdown for the opening timer (opening start time, opening end time) for opening the specific area 31x is performed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5314.

Step S5314: The main control CPU 72 executes the specific area opening / closing operation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the slide member 31c for the specific area in order to open / close the specific area 31x based on the set opening pattern (outputs a drive signal applied to the specific area solenoid 99). Perform processing. The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5316.

Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the second large winning opening 31b during the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. On the other hand, when the opening time of the second special winning opening 31b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5320.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening at the time of a small hit. If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5310 to S5320.

When it is determined in step S5316 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5320 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5322. Since the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds) for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally indicates that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5316 that the opening time has ended before confirmation.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5324.

Step S5324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the specific area passage flag is ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76, and confirms whether or not the specific area passing flag is ON depending on whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is 01H. As a result of this confirmation, when the specific area passage flag is ON (Yes), that is, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main The control CPU 72 then executes step S5326. On the other hand, when the specific area passage flag is not ON (No), that is, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 31x while the second large winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open, the main control The CPU 72 then executes step S5327a. The specific area passage flag may be set to ON in the specific area opening / closing operation process (step S5314).

Step S5326: The main control CPU 72 executes a process when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific region 31x while the second big winning opening 31b during the small hit game is open. , The process of continuously operating the first variable winning device 30, that is, the process of starting the big hit game (special game execution means via special game, special game execution means). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5327a: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the previous process (step S5262 of the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 35)). Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5327b. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device, which is the caller from step S5327a, for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5327a is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5310.

Step S5327b: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter. The value of the second large winning opening opening count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5327c: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the second large winning opening opening count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit". Is. In particular, when such an opening pattern is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round, so that the counter value is set by one opening / closing operation. Since the set number of times is reached (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5328.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern of "opening the second variable winning device 31 multiple times during one small hit" is adopted, the counter value has still reached the set number of times at the end of one opening. There will be no (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5310 to S5327b are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter progresses in step S5327b, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (step S5327c; Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5328.

Step S5328: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Specific area opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the specific area opening / closing operation process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5330: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has started. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for the release start time related to the release of the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, thereby confirming whether or not the value of the release timer is 0. Check if the 31x opening time has started. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is started (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5332. On the other hand, if the opening time of the specific area 31x has not been started (No), or if it has already been opened, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5332: The main control CPU 72 opens the specific area 31x. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is output. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region operates, and the specific region 31x shifts from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5334.

Step S5334: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 31x. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the storage area of the RAM 76 and confirms whether or not the specific area spare flag is ON. As a result of this confirmation, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is ON and the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5336. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the specific area reserve flag is OFF and the game ball has not passed through the specific area 31x (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5338.

Step S5336: The main control CPU 72 sets the specific area passage flag to ON. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and sets the value of the specific area passage flag to 01H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5338. The specific area passage flag and the specific area reserve flag are reset at the end of the big hit game.

Step S5338: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the specific area 31x has expired. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the release timer for opening the specific area 31x, which has been counted down in the countdown process (step S5312), is 0, so that the opening time of the specific area 31x is set. Check if it is finished. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5340. On the other hand, when the opening time of the specific area 31x is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

Step S5340: The main control CPU 72 closes the specific area 31x. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the specific region solenoid 99 is stopped. As a result, the slide member 31c for the specific region returns from the open state (operating state) to the closed state (non-operating state).

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the second large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Processing when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing when passing through a specific area. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S5350: The main control CPU 72 resets the small hit flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 accesses the flag buffer area of the RAM 76 and resets the value of the small hit flag to 00H. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5352.

Step S5352: The main control CPU 72 ends the small hit game. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game on the control process (small hit end). The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5354.

Step S5354: The main control CPU 72 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 can be continuously operated, and the big hit game can be started. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5356.

Step S5356: The main control CPU 72 sets "starting big role (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the winning symbol. For example, when it corresponds to the first winning symbol, a value representing "10 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5358.

Step S5358: The main control CPU 72 executes the opening pattern selection process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 refers to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area, and selects an opening pattern corresponding to the type of winning symbol when a small hit is applied. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5360.

Step S5360: The main control CPU 72 sets the operation of the first variable winning device 30. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a variable winning device that operates every round (2 rounds to the final round) during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. The type is set to the first variable winning device 30. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5362.

Step S5362: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game based on the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit. For example, "10 rounds" is set as the number of execution rounds of the open pattern corresponding to the fifth winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5364.

Step S5364: The main control CPU 72 sets a jackpot release timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening time (opening timer) for each round when the big winning opening is opened at the time of big hit. In this embodiment, it is set for each round based on the opening time of the opening pattern corresponding to the winning symbol (4th winning symbol to 6th winning symbol) related to the special symbol when the small hit is applied. For example, in the case of the 4th winning symbol, the opening time for opening the 1st big winning opening 30b is set to 29.0 seconds for the round with a ball. Therefore, if the value of the release timer is set to about 29.0 seconds, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, firing) at which the ball easily enters the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The time for firing 10 or more game balls by the control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). If the value of the opening timer is set to about 0.5 seconds, the opening time is a time during which it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b during one opening. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5366.

Step S5366: The main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot interval timer. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a standby time (interval timer) between rounds at the time of a big hit. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as an interval timer of an open pattern corresponding to a winning symbol when a small hit is hit. For example, an interval timer of about 1.0 second is set after the opening of the first large winning opening 30b between the second round and the third round is completed and once closed. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5368.

Step S5368: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the number of execution rounds set in the previous process (step S5362). For example, in the case of the fifth winning symbol, the number of execution rounds is "10 rounds", so that the continuous operation count command is generated as a command including a value representing "10 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5370.

Step S5370: The main control CPU 72 executes a time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through a specific area. In this process, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the "fifth winning symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction function operation flag to ON (time reduction state transition means, time reduction). Function operating means, state transition means).

By executing such a process, when the main control CPU 72 wins the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortening state (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 72 changes from the non-time shortening state (first state) to the time shortening state (1st state). It is possible to shift to the second state) (state transition means).

Step S5372: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of special fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of special fluctuations of the second special symbol according to the winning symbol. Specific numerical values of the number of special fluctuations are as described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the address at the end of the second prize opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 38).

[Open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area. This open pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through a specific area defines an opening / closing operation pattern of the first variable winning device 30 for each round for each different winning symbol related to a special symbol when a small hit is hit. Specifically, the following opening patterns for the large winning openings are defined for each winning symbol.

[Fifth winning symbol]
When the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. The number of execution rounds is 10 rounds. Since the number of execution rounds includes the operation of the second variable winning device 31 opened by a small hit, in the big hit game to be started from now on, 9 rounds in which 1 round is subtracted from 10 rounds are included. It is the number of rounds in the actual jackpot game (the same applies to the 6th winning symbol below). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the fifth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates during each round for 29.0 seconds, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the fifth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to substantially obtain nine rounds of balls.

[6th winning symbol]
When the game ball corresponds to the sixth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, the variable winning device to be operated is the first variable winning device 30. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 10 (the number of rounds in a substantial jackpot game is 9). Then, in each round, the opening time for opening the first large winning opening 30b is 29.0 seconds. The interval time provided between each round is 1.0 second.

In this way, when the winning symbol related to the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is the sixth winning symbol, when the big hit game is started, the opening of the second variable winning device 31 in the small hit is set as the first round. Therefore, from the second round to the tenth round, the first variable winning device 30 operates during each round for 29.0 seconds, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened. Therefore, when the game ball corresponds to the sixth winning symbol and passes through the specific area 31x, it is possible to obtain substantially nine rounds of balls.

As described above, the main control CPU 72 sets the opening pattern of the large winning opening corresponding to the type of the winning symbol related to the special symbol when the small hit is hit, with reference to the opening pattern setting table for each symbol when passing through the specific area. Will be done.

[First prize opening opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the first special winning opening. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5380: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening 30b by the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5382. When this process is executed, the main control CPU 72 can transmit an opening command at the time of a big hit to the effect control device 124. It is preferable that the opening command at the time of a big hit is transmitted only once during the big hit.

Step S5382: The main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5220 of the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) or step S5364 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 40)). Executes the countdown of the open timer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5386.

Step S5386: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the first large winning opening 30b has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer for the first large winning opening 30b after the countdown process is 0 or less. As a result of this confirmation, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is completed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. On the other hand, when the opening time of the first special winning opening 30b is not completed (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5388.

Step S5388: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5390.

Step S5390: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the above steps S5380 to S5390.

If it is determined in step S5386 above that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5390 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5392. When the value of the release timer is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the main control CPU 72 usually steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S5390. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S5386.

Step S5392: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening 30b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S5394.

Step S5394: The main control CPU 72 executes the interval standby process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 was set in the previous process (step S5222 of the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process (in FIG. 33) or step S5366 of the process when passing through a specific area (in FIG. 40)). Executes the countdown of the interval timer. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5395. Although not particularly shown here, the main control CPU 72 manages the variable winning device that is the caller from step S5394 for each interrupt until the interval time elapses (until the interval timer value becomes 0). It returns to the end address of the process (FIG. 31). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, step S5394 is directly executed instead of starting from the first step S5380.

Step S5395: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5396: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the reason why the "number of times set in the current round" is determined is to correspond to the opening pattern of, for example, "opening the first variable winning device 30 multiple times in one round during the big hit". Is. Since such an opening pattern is not particularly adopted in this embodiment, the "number of times set in the current round" is set to once in each round. Therefore, since the counter value normally reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5398.

When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted as described above, the counter value has not reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so the above steps S5380 to S5390 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5395, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5398.

Step S5398: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening closing process, and returns to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process (FIG. 37). Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closure process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening closing process. This large winning opening closing process is for continuing or terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is in a big win (big hit game), and if it is in a big role (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5402.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game and the big hit game is started after the small hit is completed, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b at the time of the small hit is treated as the first round, and the big hit is performed. The first round in which the game is started is treated as the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after the increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (14 or 15 after 1 subtraction) ( No), then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds.

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[At the time of small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the value of the open count counter is incremented.

Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5258 in FIG. 35). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the next jump destination, the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 31). Then, after the execution of the large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the large winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the large winning opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. , Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of opening times reaches the set number of opening times.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5414.

Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the termination process. This termination process is for adjusting the conditions for terminating the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501a: The main control CPU 72 executes the end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5501b: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time (ending time) has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 31).

After that, when the value of the end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes the processing after step S5502.
Regarding the end time, different times may be set for the big hit and the small hit.

Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5503. do.

Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the jackpot flag. As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit in progress" from the internal state flag here, and ends the big hit game on the control process (end of big win). The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (whether it is set). This flag is used for the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 19) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing, and the time reduction function setting process for each symbol when passing through the specific area during the previous specific area passage process (FIG. It is set in step S5370) in 40.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is 01H (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, once (or 10 times)). The set time reduction count value is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, in order to manage the number of times of time reduction, two types of time reduction counter values (first number of times cut counter value and second number of times cut counter value) are prepared. Here, the first number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "10" is set as an initial value. Further, the second number-of-times cut counter value is a variable that is decremented (subtracted by 1) each time the second special symbol fluctuates once, and "1" is set as an initial value. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not 01H (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute steps S5512 and S5513.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 wins when the condition for shifting to the time shortened state is satisfied (when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, when the winning symbol for shifting to the time shortened state is won). ), After the end of the jackpot game, advantageous conditions were applied from the non-time shortened state (predetermined game state) to the non-time shortened state (the variable time of the normal symbol lottery was shortened, and the variable start winning device It is possible to shift to a time shortened state (advantageous gaming state) (means for shifting to advantageous gaming state) (opening time is extended).

Step S5513: The main control CPU 72 executes the special variation number setting process. This process is the same as the process of step S5372 in FIG. 40.

The procedure up to this point is for a big hit, but in the case of a small hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

Step S5520, Step S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the value of the small hit flag, and also deletes "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on the flag. Specifically, with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the major winning combination, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the time reduction function activation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "time reduction in progress" is generated as an internal state. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol fluctuates in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode (park mode). The "normal mode" is a "non-time reduction state".

[F1] When a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during a game in the normal mode, [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] If the first special symbol lottery results in "missing", [F1] the normal mode is restarted.

[F4] The first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if the [F5] first winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F8] drive mode. [F8] The drive mode is a "time reduction state".

[F4] The first special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when [F7] the second winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode. [F9] The animal mode is a "non-time reduction state". The variation pattern of the [F9] animal mode may be different from that of the [F1] normal mode, or may be the same as that of the [F1] normal mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the time shortened state.
[F8] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b (when the memory of the second special symbol exists) during the game in the drive mode in the time shortened state, [F12] the second special symbol is displayed. fluctuate.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if the [F14] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state Move to.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if it corresponds to the [F15] fourth winning symbol, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and [F20] a drive in a non-time shortened state. Move to mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F20] shifts to the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.

[Game flow (3)]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state.
[F20] When the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b during the game in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state (when the memory of the second special symbol exists), [F12] the second special symbol Fluctuates.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and if the [F14] third winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and [F8] the drive mode in the time shortened state Move to.

[F13] The second special symbol lottery results in a "big hit (winning probability 1/319)", and when the [F15] fourth winning symbol is applicable, the [F6] jackpot game is executed and the mode shifts to the [F9] animal mode.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F17] fifth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F8] shifts to the drive mode in the time shortened state.

[F16] The second special symbol lottery results in a "small hit (winning probability 318/319)", which corresponds to the [F19] sixth winning symbol, and [F18] when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game. [F6] The jackpot game is executed, and [F9] shifts to the animal mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the time is shortened (the state of consecutive villas), the fluctuation of the second special symbol for one time reduction and the memory of one of the second special symbols are a total of two. You can get the chance of hitting (big hit or small hit). Then, if one of the two opportunities is won with a winning symbol with a time reduction, the game will return to the time shortened state (consecutive villa state) again.

[Game flow (4)]
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the first special symbol changes in the animal mode.
[F9] When the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 during the game in the animal mode, [F2] the first special symbol changes.

[F3] In the first special symbol lottery, it becomes "missing", and when such "missing" continues a specified number of times (for example, when 15 fluctuations are executed), [F20] specified fluctuation progress occurs, and [F1] Move to normal mode. If a "big hit" is obtained in the first special symbol lottery, the flow is the same as the game flow of FIG. 45.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 and the operation of the drum unit 200 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the big hit is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they are not visually appealing. Similarly, the mode of the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 is also a symbolic design by a 7-segment LED or the like, and also “ It has little visual impact as a "winning symbol". Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect and a stop display effect are performed using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200.

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 42 displays the effect symbol Hz (this symbol), the markers M1, the markers M2, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2, the background image corresponding to the stay mode, the image related to the notice effect, and the like. , A pseudo-effect symbol such as 7 symbols is displayed on the drum unit 200.

The effect symbol Hz displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 includes, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, and these are left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Displayed side by side. Numbers "1" to "9" are displayed on each effect symbol. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence (effect symbol arrangement) in which the numbers are arranged in descending order from "9" to "1". Such symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction.

There are three pseudo-effect symbols displayed on the drum unit 200: a pseudo-left effect symbol displayed on the left reel 201, a pseudo-middle effect symbol displayed on the middle reel 202, and a pseudo-right effect symbol displayed on the right reel 203. These are included and are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the display area of the drum unit 200. Each reel includes 7 symbols, a panda symbol, and a cherry symbol, and as each reel rotates, the pseudo-effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

49 and 50 are continuous views showing an example of an effect image corresponding to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect performed by using the liquid crystal display 42 and the drum unit 200 is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) to the stop display (including the fixed stop). Further, the stop display effect is an effect indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and that the result of the internal lottery at that time has been displayed. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 49 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), there are three columns of effect symbol Hz in the lower right area of the liquid crystal display 42. It is displayed. At this time, the effect symbol Hz is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Further, in the area on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display 42, a marker (with reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. ing. These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating storage lamp 35a) corresponding to the respective display numbers. It is represented, and the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game. Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0. Since the maximum number of working memories of the second special symbol is one, only one marker M2 is lit at the maximum.

Further, a fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed in the lower right area of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the above-mentioned left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variation display of the effect symbol Hz. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and for example, a variable display can be expressed by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed in response to the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. It is a thing. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "big hit" or "small hit" instead of "missing", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are displayed in the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color, red display color, etc.). Is displayed as stopped.

On the other hand, on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200, a "panda symbol" corresponding to "off" is displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 49 (B): For example, each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates to produce a variation display. Is started (means for executing the design effect). In the figure, the variation display of the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the variation display of the effect symbol Hz are simply indicated by a downward arrow.

A background image is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 42, and this background image represents the scenery of the park. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". The "normal mode" is a non-time reduction state. In addition to this, various modes are provided for production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time saving state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol Hz, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color. ..

[Stop the left effect design]
In FIG. 49 (C): For example, after a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, first, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are left. The symbol stops changing. In this example, the "green 7 symbol" is stopped as a pseudo left effect symbol at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "8" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 49 (B) above, the number of working memories of the oldest first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that it is located on the leftmost side in conjunction with it. The number of displayed markers M1 has been reduced by one. That is, a total of four working memory numbers of the marker M1 existed by then, but the marker M1 which is the earliest (oldest) memory number display is hidden, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is combined. Will be. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the total number of working memories has been reduced to three, and the working memory corresponding to any special symbol (in this case, the first special symbol) is consumed. It is possible to teach working memory in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the example of FIG. 49 (C), since the working memory at the head in the storage order is consumed and the remaining three are, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are one for each one. The production is performed to shift in the direction (here, to the left). As a result, it is possible to accurately express the context of the change in the number of working memories in the production, and to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one". can.

[Stop right production design]
In FIG. 50 (D): Next, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol representing "3" is stopped.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 50 (E): The stop display effect is executed in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of non-winning (missing), the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 are the same. The stop display effect is performed in the form of non-winning (missing). That is, in the illustrated example, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo-middle effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the number "1" is used as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The production symbol that represents is stopped. In this case, the combination of the pseudo effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the deviation of "green 7 symbols"-"panda symbol"-"panda symbol", and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. Since the combination of Hz is the deviation of "8"-"1"-"3", it is expressed in the production that this fluctuation corresponds to the normal "outside". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed for each change. Through such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for winning, and finally to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
51 to 53 are continuous diagrams showing the flow of reach effect executed at the time of a big hit. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, after the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of big hit is performed on the first special symbol display device 34, for example, the first special symbol is an embodiment of "first winning symbol" or "second winning symbol". (For example, 7-segment LED "self", "yo", "mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed (for example. Reach production execution means).

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 51 (A): Each reel of the drum unit 200 starts rotating in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 scrolls and fluctuates. By doing so, the variable display effect is started.

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 51 (B): When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed on the liquid crystal display 42. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes gradually from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The picture image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes may be used). The "pre-reach notice" is a production that announces the possibility of reach and the possibility of a big hit. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 51 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage pre-reach advance notice effect, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image appears additionally from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 51 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice effect" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which a second-stage picture image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display effect is being continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, progressing to the 5th stage suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 52 (D): When approaching the middle stage of the variable display effect, the pseudo left effect symbol of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200 and the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo left effect symbols at the middle position of the left reel 201 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the left effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 52 (E): Then, the pseudo right effect symbol of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200 and the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, "7 red symbols" are stopped as pseudo-right effect symbols at the middle position of the right reel 203 of the drum unit 200, and the number "7" is used as the right effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. As a result, the reach state of "7 red symbols"-"changing"-"7 red symbols" is generated in the simulated effect symbol of the drum unit 200, and "7" is generated in the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. "-" Floating "-" 7 "reach state has occurred. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time. After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed. Regarding the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, the display state may be "changing"-"changing"-"changing" without generating a clear reach state.

[Preliminary production after reach occurs]
In FIG. 52 (F): After a while when the reach state occurs, on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group and passes diagonally on the screen. It will be done. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach, the effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 53 (G): Following the notice effect after the reach occurs, a "ghost of a pumpkin" as an enemy character appears on the left side of the screen on the liquid crystal display 42, and a "male character" as a ally character appears on the right side of the screen. "Appears, and the character" VS "appears in the center of the screen.

In FIG. 53 (H): At the end of the reach production, the "pumpkin ghost" delivers innumerable punches, and the "male character" responds with a chop. If the "male character" wins in this state, it will be a big hit, and if the "male character" is defeated, it will be a loss.

[Stop display production (production at the time of winning)]
In FIG. 53 (I): When the "male character" is displayed large and the "pumpkin ghost" is displayed small along with the characters "victory !!", it means that it is a big hit. Then, substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, the pseudo-medium effect symbol of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 and the medium effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 stop the fluctuation. In this example, the "red 7 symbol" is stopped at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200 as a pseudo right effect symbol, and the number "7" is used as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect symbol to be represented is stopped. The fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to a big hit (for example, a red display color).

At the time of non-winning (at the time of loss), "Pumpkin ghost" is displayed large and "Male character" is displayed small along with the characters "Defeat ...". In this case, the "panda symbol" is stopped as a pseudo right effect symbol at the middle position of the middle reel 202 of the drum unit 200, and the effect representing a number other than the number "7" as the middle effect symbol of the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42. The symbol is stopped.

[Direction during a major role]
54 and 55 are continuous views partially showing an example of a big role playing effect performed during a big hit game. It should be noted that the following large-scale production is an production performed on the liquid crystal display 42.

[Start of big hit game]
In FIG. 54 (A): When the big hit game is started, for example, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the screen, and a production image (for example, a female character) peculiar to the big hit game is displayed. ..

["Right-handed" display during major roles]
Further, in the present embodiment, since the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the right side portion in the game area 8a, the right side portion in the game area 8a is designated as the launch position (launch direction) of the game ball during the big role. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the above-mentioned firing position designation display lamp 38f is lit and displayed under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the firing position designation command indicating “right-handed” is transmitted to the effect control device 124. In response to this, guidance information (arrow indicating the right direction, characters of "right-handed", etc.) prompting "right-handed" is displayed in the display screen on the effect control by the effect control CPU 126).

[1st round]
In FIG. 54 (B): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, 10 circles are displayed together with the character information of "BIG BONUS" in the upper left part of the screen. Then, the ○ mark located on the leftmost side is displayed in red (hatching of diagonal lines), and the remaining 9 ○ marks are displayed in white. As a result, 10 rounds can be won, the current round is the first of the 10 rounds, and a circle is marked every time one round in which a ball can be obtained progresses. It is possible to teach the player that it is displayed in red.

[10th round]
In FIG. 54 (C): After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and for example, when the game shifts to the 10th round, for example, all 10 circles are displayed in red. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that all the rounds in which the ball can be obtained in the 10th round are completed.

Here, if it corresponds to the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state, or if there is a memory of the second special symbol even if it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state, as shown in the figure. , A fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to the drive mode) is executed in which fireworks are launched. If it does not correspond to the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state, or if there is no memory of the second special symbol, the fireworks effect is not executed. Fireworks production can be performed in any round.

[Time reduction state rush production]
In FIG. 55 (D): When shifting to the time shortened state, an effect of displaying character information such as "Enter drive mode!" Is executed using the end time (ending time) of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to teach the player that the "drive mode" is about to start. In addition, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the game proceeds by hitting right even in the "drive mode".

Here, during the ending production, a notification is given to remind the user of forgetting to take the prepaid card, such as "Be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card", or to prevent the game from being absorbed into the game, such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game". The notification may be executed.

[End of big hit game, time shortened state]
In FIG. 55 (E): When the jackpot game is completed and the internal state (game state) is set to the time shortened state, the stay mode is set to the "drive mode", and the background image is the car on which the female rides. It will be changed to an image that expresses the state of traveling on the ground. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the current internal state (game state) is a time shortened state different from the normal state.

[Time saving and medium production]
In this way, when the game is proceeding in the time shortened state, the time saving medium effect (advantageous game state effect) for displaying the background image corresponding to the time shortened state (advantageous game state) is executed.

[Right-handed suggestion production]
Further, at the upper part of the screen, a right-handed suggestion effect is executed. In the right-handed suggestion effect, a band-shaped area is provided at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and right-handed character information and a right-pointing arrow symbol are displayed in the band-shaped area. It should be noted that such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the gaming state is the time shortened state. Then, by executing such an effect, it is possible to urge the player to "hit right".

[Remaining number display effect]
Further, in the lower left of the screen, the remaining number of times display effect is executed. In the remaining number display effect, a rectangular area is provided at the lower left of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the remaining number of times that the game can be advanced in the drive mode is displayed in the rectangular area. In the illustrated example, the information of "remaining two times" is displayed. The remaining number of times is subtracted by 1 each time the second special symbol fluctuates and stops in the drive mode in the time shortened state or the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Therefore, the remaining number of times is not subtracted even if the first special symbol fluctuates and stops in the time shortened state or the non-time shortened state.

[Example of drive mode (time reduction state)]
56 to 58 are continuous views showing an example of a drive mode effect.

In FIG. 56 (A): In the drive mode, the background image is changed to an image representing a state in which a car in which a female rides is traveling on the ground. The combination of the pseudo effect symbols displayed on the effective line in the middle of the drum unit 200 is the winning item of "7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols"-"7 red symbols", and the effect of the liquid crystal display 42. The combination of symbol Hz is the winning item of "7"-"7"-"7". This shows the outcome at the time of winning. Further, at the upper part of the screen, the right-handed suggestion effect is executed, and such a right-handed suggestion effect is continuously executed when the game state is the time shortened state.
The backlight of the drum unit 200 may be made to emit light in a predetermined color in conjunction with the background image of the liquid crystal display.

[Start of change of special symbol]
In FIG. 56 (B): At the time of the first hit with the first special symbol, the memory of the first special symbol is often stored, and the memory of the second special symbol is generally not stored. In the illustrated example, four memories (marker M1) of the first special symbol are stored. Therefore, when the drive mode is entered in such a situation, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the memory of the first special symbol is not accumulated, the player executes a right-handed strike to first execute the change of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z1 also start variation. Here, in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, it is assumed that it corresponds to the loss.

[End of change of 1st special symbol]
In FIG. 56 (C): When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of being off, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200, the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 of the liquid crystal display 42 are also off. It is stopped and displayed in the mode of. During this time, it is assumed that the player executes a right-handed hit, a plurality of game balls pass through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball enters the right start winning opening 28b. .. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is not subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times remains as the remaining two times.

In FIG. 57 (D): Since the memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in the order of winning, the remaining three memories of the first special symbol are digested after this. Then, when the digestion of the remaining memory of the first special symbol is completed, the internal lottery is next executed using the memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the drum unit 200 starts rotating accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also start variation. Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol.

[Start small hit, open second prize opening]
In FIG. 57 (E): Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the pseudo-directed symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"),. The effect symbol Hz (combination of "5"-"2"-"6") of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit. As a result, the small hit game is started, and the second big winning opening 31b is opened. Then, the effect that the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen is executed. Further, for example, the player executes a right-handed strike during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the variable start winning device 28 is opened, and one game ball is a right-start winning opening. It is assumed that the ball has entered 28b. In this case, one memory (marker M2) of the second special symbol is accumulated.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is the remaining one time.

In FIG. 57 (F): When the small hit game is started, a production is performed in which the hermit character utters the line "Aim at the attacker in the lower right". As a result, it is possible to convey to the player that the game ball must be entered into the second variable winning device 31.

[Passing through a specific area]
FIG. 58 (G): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and emits a line such as "I did it! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game]
FIG. 58 (H): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is.

After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. For example, if the winning symbol at the time of a small hit related to the 2nd special symbol corresponds to the 6th winning symbol, substantially 9 rounds of balls (10 rounds of balls including the small hit game) are obtained. can do. In addition, when the big hit game is executed in the drive mode, the big role middle effect dedicated to the winning in the drive mode may be executed.

FIGS. 59 and 60 are continuous diagrams showing an example of effect when the second special symbol fluctuates in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Such a situation occurs mainly in the final change of the time shortened state, in which the big hit game is executed corresponding to the big hit of the "4th winning symbol" or the small hit of the "6th winning symbol", and the first 2 This is the case when the memory of the special symbol is accumulated.

Here, it is assumed that one memory of the second special symbol exists. For this reason, the time-saving and medium-time production is continuously executed. In addition, the information of "one remaining time" is displayed as the remaining number of times display effect. However, the right-handed suggestion effect has not been executed.

[During display of fluctuations in special symbols]
In FIG. 59 (A): When the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the drum unit 200 starts to rotate accordingly, and the effect symbol Hz and the th. 4 The fluctuation of the symbol Z2 also starts.

[Continuation of variable display production]
In FIG. 59 (B): The variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state. Along with this, the rotation of the drum unit 200 continues, and the effect symbol Hz of the liquid crystal display 42 and the fourth symbol Z2 also continue to fluctuate. Since the situation here is not a time-reduced state, the probability that the variable start winning device 28 will be open for a long time is low even if the start gate 20 is passed. Therefore, basically, it is not possible to store the memory of the second special symbol. Therefore, the drive mode in such a non-time shortened state becomes a chance zone in which the second special symbol fluctuates at most once.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 59 (C): Here, it is assumed that a small hit is won in the internal lottery regarding the second special symbol. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the pseudo effect symbol of the drum unit 200 (combination of "cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol"-"cherry symbol") and the effect symbol of the liquid crystal display 42. The Hz (combination of "2"-"2"-"3") and the fourth symbol Z2 (green display color) of the liquid crystal display 42 are also stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit. In this case, the effect that the animal character raises the "mark on which the number 7 is displayed" is executed.

Here, since the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining number of times is subtracted and displayed. Specifically, the display of the remaining number of times is 0 times remaining.

[Start small hit, open second prize opening]
In FIG. 60 (D): Then, when the small hit game is started, the second big winning opening 31b is opened, and the car on which the female character is riding speeds up and moves to the right side of the screen. Will be executed. At this time, an effect of leaving the animal character behind is executed.

[Passing through a specific area]
In FIG. 60 (E): The second variable winning device 31 shifts to the open state due to the small hit game, the game ball passes through the specific area 31x, and the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is the sixth winning symbol. do. In this example, a female character in a car raises a heart symbol with the letter V and emits a line such as "I did it! BIG BONUS !!". Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 31x and that the big hit game (BIG BONUS) is to be started from now on.

[End of small hit, start of big hit game]
In FIG. 60 (F): After that, the small hit game ends, and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) is closed. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the big hit game is started. In this example, a female character peculiar to the jackpot game appears, character information such as "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and a production in which the female character emits the same lines is executed. Further, on the display screen, character information such as "Please hit right as it is" is displayed along with an arrow indicating the right direction, and it is possible to teach the player that the big hit game proceeds by hitting right as it is. After that, the same production during the jackpot game as described above is started, and the jackpot game progresses. Then, when the big hit game is executed corresponding to the sixth winning symbol in the drive mode in the non-time shortened state, the game shifts to the animal mode after the big hit game is completed.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an outline of the drive mode.
The first effect example shows an effect example when a normal game is performed, and the second effect example shows an effect example when an irregular game is performed.

[First production example]
The state (A) in FIG. 61 is a state in which the drive mode has two remaining times (a state in which a big hit may occur at least two times remaining), and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a time shortened state. be.
If the state shown in FIG. 61 (A) corresponds to a time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 61 (A) again after the big hit game is completed.
On the other hand, when the state (A) in FIG. 61 corresponds to the no-time reduction hit and the second special symbol is stored, the state shifts to the state (B) in FIG. 61 after the big hit game is completed.

The state (B) in FIG. 61 is a state in which the drive mode is one remaining time (a state in which a big hit may occur at least once remaining), and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortening state. (Memory digestion section).
If the state shown in FIG. 61 (B) corresponds to a time-saving hit, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 61 (A) after the big hit game is completed.
On the other hand, if the state in FIG. 61 (B) corresponds to the time reduction no hit, the state shifts to the state in FIG. 61 (C) after the end of the big hit game.

The state (C) in FIG. 61 is an animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortening state (immediate stop prevention section). The animal mode ends after a specified number of fluctuations, and then shifts to the normal mode.

[Second production example]
The state (D) in FIG. 61 is a state in which the drive mode is the remaining two times, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a time shortening state.
If the state (D) in FIG. 61 corresponds to the hit without time reduction and there is no memory of the second special symbol, the state shifts to the state (E) in FIG. 61 after the big hit game is completed.

The state (E) in FIG. 61 is an animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and eventually the memory of the first special symbol will be digested.

[Overview of drive mode]
The drive mode (continuous villa state) transitions as shown in FIGS. 61 (A) to (C) when a normal game is performed.
If the player wins without shortening the time in the shortened time state, the game state of the main control device becomes the memory digestion section after the big hit game. At this time, in the present embodiment, if there is a memory of the second special symbol, there is a 1/1 probability of a big hit (a big hit or a big hit via a small hit). The upper limit of the memory of the second special symbol is one. Therefore, when there is a memory of the second special symbol, the effect of the drive mode is continued (it looks like the continuation of the consecutive villas; see (A) to (C) in FIGS. 61).

When a normal game is played, since the memory of the second special symbol is stored at the time of the big hit in the time shortened state, such a state transition occurs, but at the time of no time saving hit in the time shortened state, the second special If there is no memory of the design, the consecutive villas will virtually end there.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gaming state of the main control device is shifted to the animal mode in which the continuous villa is not continued even in the memory digestion section (see (D) and (E) in FIGS. 61).
Since the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol at the time of winning is related to the big hit effect, the determination of the presence or absence of the memory of the second special symbol is performed when the opening command of the small hit or the big hit is received.

For this reason, if the player wins without the memory of the second special symbol and the memory of the second special symbol is accumulated during the round of the big hit game, after shifting to the animal mode, the second in the memory digestion section. I try to change the special design.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section.
The first effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section, but the second special symbol is stored.
The second effect example shows an effect example in which the deviation variation of the first special symbol is executed in the memory digestion section and the second special symbol is not stored.

[First production example]
The state (A) in FIG. 62 is a state in which the drive mode is one time remaining, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortening state (memory digestion section).
When the first special symbol is displaced in the state of (A) in FIG. 62, a reach effect (for example, an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched) is produced as shown in FIG. 62 (B). Is executed, and as shown in FIG. 62 (C), an effect that is finally out of alignment (for example, an effect that fails to launch fireworks) is executed.

[Second production example]
The state (D) in FIG. 62 is an animal mode, and the gaming state of the main control device 70 is a non-time shortened state (memory digestion section). However, in this state, since there is no memory of the second special symbol, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, and if the player hits the left, the first special symbol will change.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), during the execution of the out-of-order variation of the first special symbol, a special pseudo-variation effect in which the variation is pseudo-executed a plurality of times is executed, and finally. An out-of-order effect is executed. In the special pseudo-variation effect, the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time (variation scale).

When the apparent effect is the animal mode in spite of the memory digestion section, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation of several tens of seconds) is set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol.
At this time, if the player shifts to the drive mode and performs an off-the-shelf effect, the appearance is consistent, but there is a risk that the player may misunderstand because of the relationship of "drive mode = during the consecutive villas".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the memory digestion section and the apparent effect is the animal mode, the lottery for executing the content of the variable display effect is switched to change the change start and change stop. After repeating the scale, the effect of making a decision is made so that there is no apparent discomfort.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the difference between the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the memory digestion section and the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected in the immediate stop prevention section.

As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the variation pattern selection table of the memory digestion section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the variation pattern of long-term variation is selected as the variation pattern to be selected. May be done. For example, the variation pattern of long-term variation is a variation pattern having a variation time of 56.0 seconds.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), in the variation pattern selection table of the immediate stop prevention section, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is out of order, the variation pattern to be selected is the first short-time variation. -The fluctuation pattern of the third short-time fluctuation may be selected. For example, the fluctuation pattern of the first short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20.0 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern of the second short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 13.5 seconds. The fluctuation pattern of the third short-time fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 6.0 seconds.

The deviation variation of the first special symbol, which is the problem this time, is a long-term variation shown in FIG. 63 (A), and this variation is selected in the memory digestion section but not in the immediate stop prevention section.
Therefore, when the game state is the memory digestion section and the apparent mode is the animal mode corresponding to the immediate stop prevention section, as described above, in order to match the production, a special pseudo A variable effect is being performed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the flow of the game regarding the game state and the launch direction.
The following game flow is the game flow when the consecutive villa state ends in the shortest time.
Specifically, in the non-time reduction state, the big hit of the "1st winning type (with time reduction)" is won, and in the time reduction state, the small hit of the "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won, and the non-time reduction is achieved. This is the flow of the game when a small hit of "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won in the state.
The gaming state progresses in the order of No1 to No13.

[No1]
The "game state" is the "first special symbol change", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed".
At the start of the game, the first special symbol is changed to aim for a big hit.

[No2]
The "game state" is "big hit (first hit, first big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". Here, it is assumed that the jackpot of the "first winning type (with time reduction)" is won.

[No3]
The "game state" is the "time reduction state", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed".
When the gaming state shifts from the non-time shortened state to the time shortened state, the firing direction becomes right-handed.

[No4]
The "game state" is the "first special symbol variation (short variation)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The memory of the first special symbol accumulated at the time of the first hit is digested at high speed.

[No5]
The "game state" is the "second special symbol fluctuation (time shortened state, memory +1)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". During the change of the second special symbol, one memory of the second special symbol can be stored.

[No6]
The "game state" is "second special symbol stop (time shortened state end)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". When the game state shifts from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state when the second special symbol is stopped, the firing direction is switched from right-handed to left-handed.

[No7]
The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No8]
The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (second big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No9]
The "game state" is the "second special symbol fluctuation (non-time shortened state)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Here, the memory of the second special symbol cannot be increased.

[No10]
The "game state" is "memory increase of the first special symbol", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". Up to 4 memories of the 1st special symbol can be stored.

[No11]
The "game state" is "second special symbol stop", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". The launch direction continues to be left-handed.

[No12]
The "game state" is "big hit via small hit (third big hit)", and the "launch direction" is "right-handed". The firing direction during the small hit game or the big hit game is right-handed. Here, it is assumed that the small hit of "6th winning type (no time reduction)" is won.

[No13]
The "game state" is "the end of the jackpot for one set (three times)", and the "launch direction" is "left-handed". In this case, the mode shifts to the animal mode. In this way, if the winning symbol without time reduction (for example, "sixth winning type (no time reduction)") is applied twice in a row, the consecutive villa state is terminated.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. The above-mentioned variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach advance notice effect, memory number display effect, major role effect, effect using liquid crystal display 42 and drum unit 200, time saving medium effect, right-handed suggestion effect, remaining number display effect, etc. Are all controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium other effect processing (step S402a), and drum unit effect management process. (Step S403), special variable effect management process (step S403a), display output process (step S404), lamp drive process (step S406), acoustic drive process (step S408), effect random number update process (step S410), and others. It is a configuration including a group of subroutines of the process (step S412) of. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory number increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory number decrease effect command, and a start command. Mouth winning sound control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, status specification command, round number command, launch position specification command, error notification command, jackpot There are end effect command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, count cut counter command, various error commands, special fluctuation count specification command, big hit opening command, small hit opening command, etc.

Step S401: In the operation storage effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-mentioned storage number display effect and the pre-reading advance notice effect using the marker M1. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, and the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable. It controls the content of the effect when the winning device 31 is opened and closed. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). As described above, in the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 displays the effect contents (effect symbol Hz, fourth symbol Z1, Z2, markers M1, M2, effect contents related to the important role production, etc.) displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of determining the content of the notice effect) is executed. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S402a: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processes such as time reduction, pseudo time reduction, and so on. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content related to the right-handed suggestion effect, the remaining number of times display effect, and the like. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403: In the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of controlling the drum unit 200 based on the effect content determined in the effect symbol management process. As described above, in the drum unit effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining the effect content (effect content related to the pseudo effect symbol, content related to the movement of the drum unit 200) to be displayed on the drum unit 200. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S403a: In the special changing effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the special changing effect based on the special variation number designation command, and if it is determined to execute, what kind of content is there? Executes the process of determining whether to execute the effect during special fluctuation. It should be noted that this process may be executed in the effect symbol change pre-process.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that executes a non-reach effect (for example, an effect that fluctuates the effect symbol at high speed) when a special variation pattern for a short time (about several seconds) is selected. However, when a special variation pattern for a long time (about several tens of seconds) is selected, a process of selecting an effect pattern for executing a reach effect or the like is executed.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 asks the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) for basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, variation effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, a board lamp 53, and the like (on / off, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the drive IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.
In this process, the effect control CPU 126 may manage the effect of the drum unit 200 (process for controlling the drum unit 200).

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect content in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the effect symbol management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described according to a procedure example.

Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the effect command when the number of working memories increases. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of displaying the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol or the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect control CPU 126 has received the operation memory number reduction effect command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is saved. When it is confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of extinguishing the marker M1 or the marker M2 corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery, and causes the remaining markers M1 and M2 not consumed by the internal lottery to the left. Perform the effect of sliding.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S502 to step S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) is selected as the jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 18) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol change pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type (type of winning symbol), variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern (reach) for the advance notice effect. Pre-occurrence advance notice pattern, post-occurrence advance notice pattern, etc.) can be selected. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demo effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of a variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. The control information of is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed up to that point in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effective manner (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit game or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the big role effect according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called waiting state for customers.
In addition, in the effect indicating the waiting state for customers, a content for preventing the devotion to the game such as "Be careful about the devotion to the game" may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily perform the effect of preventing the player from getting stuck at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the content of the demo effect based on the demo effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 65) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 65). do.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the out-of-order normal variation or the out-of-reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the change this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the fluctuation pattern command of this time corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot fluctuation. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes the small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can refer to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and select the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. can. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the change schedule (variation time) and stop of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time. Determine the display mode and the like.

For example, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in the "drive mode" state at the time of the small hit fluctuation of the second special symbol in the time shortened state, and finally the effect corresponding to the small hit. A process of selecting an effect pattern for stopping and displaying the symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 is executed.
On the other hand, the effect control CPU 126 changes the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 in a state where the "drive mode" is continued or a normal mode, for example, when the small hit of the second special symbol is changed in the non-time shortened state. Finally, a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the small hit is executed.

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is out of alignment in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of loss are classified into "out-of-time normal variation", "time-shortening out-of-time variation", "out-of-reach variation", and the like, and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "out-of-reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of off is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol Hz and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time and reach). The presence or absence of occurrence, the reach type and reach occurrence timing in the case of reach occurrence), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined. It should be noted that the method of determining the effect at the time of such a loss is the same at the time of a big hit.

When any of the processes of step S608, step S610, and step S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, time shortened state). As described above, the advance notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that a reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or to notify the player that there is a possibility of a big hit or a small hit in the end. .. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set higher at the time of winning in order to raise the expectation of the player.

Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes the mode effect management process (advantageous game state effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, in principle, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the normal mode when the internal state is the non-time shortened state, and when the internal state is the time shortened state, the effect control CPU 126 executes the process. The process of selecting the background image corresponding to the drive mode (the process of selecting the time-saving and medium-duty effect) is executed.

However, as an exception, the effect control CPU 126 has a case where the memory of the second special symbol exists when the time-reduced state is changed to the non-time-reduced state even when the internal state is the non-time-reduced state. Select the background image corresponding to the drive mode (advantageous gaming state effect executing means, advantageous gaming state effect continuous executing means). It should be noted that such an exceptional process is executed in the process of displaying the effect symbol stop, which will be described later.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 67), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect execution means). The advance notice effect is executed based on various advance notice effect patterns. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here.

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the deviation effect variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S620: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the storage digestion section. The memory digestion section is a section for digesting the memory of the second special symbol in the non-time reduction state shifted after the end of the time reduction state. The memory digestion section is, for example, the first variable section of the second special symbol and the first to fourth variable sections of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit game. After the memory digestion section is completed, an immediate stop prevention section for the animal mode is set.

The memory digestion section and the immediate stop prevention section may be managed only by the main control device, may be managed only by the effect control device, or may be managed by both devices. For example, the memory digestion section can be managed by the memory digestion section stay flag. The memory digestion section stay flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, and when the first variable section of the second special symbol ends after the end of the jackpot game, or when the fifth variable section of the first special symbol ends. Set to OFF when starting. On the other hand, the immediate stop prevention section is set to ON at the timing when the memory digestion section stay flag is set from ON to OFF, and the change of the special symbol of the specified number of times is completed with the immediate stop prevention section set to ON. At that time, set it to OFF.

When the game is played normally (when the right-handed strike is continued in the shortened time state), the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the memory digestion section, but the game is not played normally (when the game is not played normally). If the time is shortened and the right-handed strike is not continued), the memory of the first special symbol may be digested in the memory digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S621, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), the effect is produced. The control CPU 126 executes step S625.

Step S621: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation of the first special symbol.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S622, and it cannot be confirmed that the current variation is the variation of the first special symbol. In the case (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S625.

Step S622: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S623, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the second. 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S624.

Step S623: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a special pseudo-variation effect. The special pseudo-variation effect is an effect in which the fluctuation start action and the fluctuation stop action are executed a plurality of times according to the fluctuation time.

Step S624: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a reach loss effect. The effect control CPU 126 executes, for example, an effect of whether or not the fireworks are successfully launched, and finally selects an effect of failing to launch the fireworks.

Step S625: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an out-of-effect effect according to the stay mode and the fluctuation pattern. The effect control CPU 126 may, for example, select a mere off-effect effect or execute a reach effect to select an out-of-effect effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S630: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortened state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current gaming state is the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S634, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current gaming state is the time shortened state (No). , The effect control CPU 126 executes step S631.

Step S631: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current state is the storage digestion section.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S632, and when it cannot be confirmed that the current state is the memory digestion section (No), the effect is produced. The control CPU 126 executes step S633.

Step S632: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S635, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the first. 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S634.

Step S633: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the fluctuation is within a specified number of times (for example, within 15 times) after the big hit game.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S635, and when it cannot be confirmed that the fluctuation is within the specified number of times after the big hit game (Yes). No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S636.

Step S634: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the drive mode.

Step S635: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the animal mode.

Step S636: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the normal mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

By executing such a process, if the effect control CPU 126 has a memory of the second special symbol (if the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, the state of the memory of the lottery element is a special state). (If), it is possible to execute a drive mode effect (common effect) with common contents in the non-time shortened state (first state, normal state) and the time shortened state (second state, advantageous state) (effect). Execution means).

Further, by executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 has a special storage state of the lottery element unless the second special symbol is stored (if the state of the lottery element storage means is not a special state). Drive mode effect (non-common effect) and animal mode effect (non-common effect) with different contents in the non-time shortened state (first state, normal state) and time shortened state (second state, advantageous state). Makes it possible to execute (common production) (effect execution means).

[Processing during display of production symbol stop]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process during display of the effect symbol stop display. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S650: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state specification command. The internal state can also be confirmed by using the fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the same applies).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S652, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control CPU 126 is in the step. Execute S656.

Step S652: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the time reduction is the final variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can access the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and check the number-of-count counter command to check whether or not the time reduction is the final fluctuation. For example, if the first count cut counter value or the second count cut counter value is a fluctuation when switching from "1" to "0", the effect control CPU 126 can determine that it is a time saving final fluctuation.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time reduction final variation is performed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S654, and when it cannot be confirmed that the time reduction final variation is performed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666. ..

Step S654: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the storage number of the second special symbol in the pseudo time saving counter. The pseudo time saving counter is stored in the RAM 130. For example, when the storage number of the second special symbol is "0", "0" is set in the pseudo time saving counter and the storage number of the second special symbol is "1". , "1" is set in the pseudo time reduction counter.
When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666.

Step S656: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the stay background is a normal background, that is, whether or not the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is a background image corresponding to the normal mode.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S666, and when it cannot be confirmed that the stay background is the normal background (No), the effect control CPU 126 is stepped. Execute S658.

Step S658: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S660, and the value of the pseudo time saving counter is larger than 0. If it cannot be confirmed (No), that is, if the value of the pseudo time saving counter is 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S664.

Step S660: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as a pseudo time-saving background. The pseudo time saving background is the background of the drive mode in which the right-handed display is not displayed.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 of the effect control CPU 126 is a pseudo time saving counter even when the time shortening state (advantageous gaming state) ends and the non-time shortening state (predetermined gaming state) is entered. When the value is larger than 0 (when a special condition is satisfied), the time-saving and medium-time effect (advantageous game state effect) can be continuously executed (advantageous game state effect continuous execution means). ..

Step S662: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo time reduction counter.

Step S664: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the stay background as the normal background. The normal background is the background of the normal mode.

Step S666: The effect control CPU 126 executes other processing. In other processing, as described above, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect according to the result of the internal lottery.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 67).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process when the variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the result of this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the lottery result command, and confirms whether it corresponds to a big hit or a small hit. As a result of this confirmation, if the result of this fluctuation is a big hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S802. On the other hand, if the result of this variation is not a big hit (No), that is, if it is a small hit, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S804.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 executes the process when the jackpot variable winning device is activated. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores various image data related to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit stored in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP152) in advance as a large role effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The process of reading according to the winning symbol is executed.

Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit variable winning device operation time process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern to be executed from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (for example, an effect in which a car on which a female character is riding speeds up) indicating that the small hit game has started at the start of the small hit game, and suggests a right-handed strike. If the game ball passes through the specific area 31x during the small hit game, the effect pattern when passing through the specific area (a heart mark with the letter V drawn by the female character in the car) is displayed. Execute the process of selecting the effect to be raised).

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 67).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated at the time of big hit]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process when the jackpot variable winning device is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a big hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of big hit is received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S811, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of big hit is received (No), the effect control CPU 126 is executed. Returns to the process when the variable winning device is activated (FIG. 72).

Step S811: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S812, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the first. 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S814.

Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is a winning symbol that shifts to the time shortening state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current jackpot is the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S814, and the current jackpot is the winning symbol that shifts to the time shortened state. If (No) cannot be confirmed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S813.

Step S813: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the first selection table. The jackpot effect included in the first selection table is a jackpot effect that does not include a fireworks effect (an effect that suggests a shift to the drive mode).

Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the second selection table. The jackpot effect included in the second selection table is a jackpot effect including a fireworks effect.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated for small hits]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the process when the variable winning device for small hits is operated. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not an opening command at the time of a small hit has been received.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the opening command at the time of a small hit has been received (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S821, and when it cannot be confirmed that the opening command at the time of a small hit has been received (No), the effect The control CPU 126 returns to the process when the variable winning device is activated (FIG. 72).

Step S8211: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the second special symbol is stored.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S822, and when it cannot be confirmed that there is no memory of the second special symbol (No), that is, the first. 2 When it is confirmed that the special symbol is stored, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the small hit this time is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortening state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current small hit is a winning symbol that leads to the big hit that shifts to the time shortened state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824, and the current small hit shifts to the time shortened state. If it cannot be confirmed that the symbol is a winning symbol that leads to a big hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S823.

Step S823: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the third selection table. The small hit effect included in the third selection table is a small hit effect that does not include an effect suggesting a shift to the drive mode.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a jackpot effect from the fourth selection table. The small hit effect included in the fourth selection table is a small hit effect including an effect suggesting the transition to the drive mode.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 68).

[Time saving medium and pseudo time saving medium Other production processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the time saving medium, the pseudo time saving medium, and other effect processing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Here, the time reduction medium (time reduction) is a time reduction state, and the pseudo time reduction medium (pseudo time reduction) is a state in which the background image during the time reduction is displayed in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction state). Drive mode).

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is during the time reduction (time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state specification command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852 and step S854, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the time saving (No), the effect control is performed. The CPU 126 executes step S856.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the count cut counter command, and selects an effect pattern that displays the value obtained by adding "1" to the second count cut counter value as the remaining number of times. Execute the process to be performed. As a result, during the time reduction, the value of "remaining 2 times" or "remaining 1 time" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed suggestion effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the right-handed suggestion effect at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

Step S855: The effect control CPU 126 executes the right-handed emphasis effect selection process. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 126 needs to execute the right-handed emphasis effect, for example, when the player continues to left-handed even though the time has been shortened (particularly,). The process of selecting an effect pattern for displaying an image corresponding to the effect of emphasizing right-handed striking is executed at the upper part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 at the 5th or 10th variation of the first special symbol).

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction. When the value of the pseudo time reduction counter is larger than 0, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the pseudo time reduction is in progress.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858, and when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is in the pseudo time reduction (No), the effect control CPU 126 is executed. Returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes the remaining number of times display process based on the pseudo time reduction counter. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern that displays the value of the pseudo time reduction counter as the remaining number of times. As a result, during the pseudo time reduction, the value of "remaining 1 time (last)" is displayed as the remaining number of times of the remaining number display effect.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

[Drum unit production management process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the drum unit effect management process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body operation schedule determination process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 operates the operation schedule (variation mode, stop mode, etc.) of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern (effect pattern number, etc.) determined by the effect symbol management process (step S402 in FIG. 65). Executes the process of determining.

When the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 stores the determined operation schedule in the operation schedule storage buffer of the RAM 130. Further, when the operation schedule is determined, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of turning on the drum unit operating flag of the RAM 130, and executes a process of turning off the drum unit operating flag when all the determined schedules are executed. ..

The operation schedule is set for each reel (each movable body). For example, in the case of the left reel 201, "acceleration"-> "constant velocity"-> "deceleration"-> "stop" in order from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation. And so on. Among them, "acceleration" and "deceleration" have a plurality of speed changes, and "constant speed" may also have a plurality of speed changes (for example, "low speed constant speed", "medium speed, etc." "Speed", "High speed constant speed", etc.).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of speeds (for example, about 100 types of speeds) are prepared as the setting speeds of the motor (reel), and various setting information (number of steps of the motor) is prepared in a plurality of movable body data tables (not shown). , The set speed of the motor, the time required for the operation of the motor, the excitation method of the motor, the phase designation information for designating the phase to be excited by the motor, etc.) are stored. Different setting information is stored in each movable body data table.

The effect control CPU 126 determines which movable body data table is referred to in what order and at what timing based on the operation schedule of the drum unit (movable body unit) 200. The movable body data stored in the movable body data table being referred to is transmitted to the driver (IC) of the drum unit 200 by being stored in the movable body data setting area (not shown). The driver of the drum unit 200 drives each reel based on the movable body data.

The effect control CPU 126 basically overwrites the new movable body data in the movable body data setting area (switches the movable body data table being referenced) when the speed of each reel is changed. Even when the speed of each reel is maintained, new movable body data may be overwritten in the movable body data setting area (the moving body data table being referenced is not switched).

This is because, when maintaining a constant speed, if a number of movable body data tables corresponding to the number of variable seconds of the special symbol is prepared, a number of movable body data tables corresponding to the number of variable seconds of the special symbol will be prepared. This is because the capacity of the movable data table becomes large.

The operation schedule of the drum unit 200 corresponding to the effect pattern is as follows.
For example, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the non-reach off effect, the effect control CPU 126 starts the rotation of the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the fluctuation, and the left reel 201 after a predetermined time elapses. Is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitch can be an arbitrary shift stitch or a stop stitch corresponding to the stop stitch of the effect symbol Hz.

On the other hand, when the effect pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the reach effect (big hit variation, small hit variation, missed variation), the effect control CPU 126 starts rotating the left reel 201, the middle reel 202, and the right reel 203 at the start of the variation. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the left reel 201 is stopped, then the right reel 203 is stopped, a reach state is generated, and finally the middle reel 202 is stopped. The stop stitches correspond to the stop stitches corresponding to the stop stitches of the production symbol Hz (three sets of seven symbols of the same color corresponding to the big hit, the three sets of cherry symbols corresponding to the small hits, and the misses. It can be the deviation of one frame of the middle reel 202).

In any case, the effect control CPU 126 determines the operation schedule of the drum unit 200 based on the effect pattern determined by the effect symbol management process in the movable body operation schedule determination process, and produces the effect based on the determined operation schedule. The contents and order of the movable body data table (deceleration sequence, deceleration sequence to which a control code is added, acceleration sequence, drive start sequence, drive stop sequence, etc.) to be referred to are determined.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes the movable body data setting start process. This process is executed only when the setting of the movable body data is started during the execution of the effect, that is, when the overwriting of the movable body data occurs.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 overwrites the movable body data of the movable body data table currently being referred to with the movable body data of the movable body data table to be referred to next, that is, to be referred to next. The process of storing the movable body data stored in the planned movable body data table in the movable body data setting area is executed, and it is determined whether or not it is the end of the movable body data (the planned movable body to be referred to next). (Check if the body data table exists) and execute the process of storing the movable body data stored in the movable body data table in the movable body data setting area until it is determined that the end of the movable body data is reached. Perform the process of doing something.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 65).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern of measures for immediate termination of a continuous villa state.
In the figure (A), an example of a transition of a special fluctuation pattern when a game is played without following the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), one special symbol memory is stored. When the second special symbol became a small hit or a big hit in the memory of the second special symbol, and the time was shortened at the end of the big hit game, that is, the launch of the game ball was stopped during the memory digestion of the second special symbol. In this case, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "first variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the first variation after the end of the big hit game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation (reach effect) dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.

In the figure (B), a transition example of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played according to the transition of the firing direction is shown.
For example, when the time reduction state ends and the state shifts to the non-time reduction state, and the memory of the second special symbol is digested in the non-time reduction state (during the left-handed state), four special symbol memories are stored. When the game is saved and the memory of the 2nd special symbol becomes a small hit or a big hit, and the time is shortened at the end of the big hit game, that is, when the memory of the 2nd special symbol is digested, the first special symbol is hit to the left. When four memories are stored, the transition of the special fluctuation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table D (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are fluctuations of the 1st special symbol after the memory digestion of the 2nd special symbol (variation time is about 90 to 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the first special symbol can be executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table D (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table". The table selected here may be the "variable pattern table E (second special symbol)".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the big hit game is the variation of the second special symbol after the memory digestion of the second special symbol (variation time is 120 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the reach variation dedicated to the second special symbol can be executed.
By executing the striking method shown in (B) in the figure, it is possible to avoid the immediate end of the consecutive villa state (the situation where the consecutive villa state ends immediately).

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a transition example of a special fluctuation pattern in consideration of irregular striking.
In the figure (A), a transition example of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played according to the firing direction is shown.
For example, if four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit and the right-handed strike is continued in a state where the time is shortened after the big hit game is completed, that is, all the memories of the first special symbol are digested and the first 2 When the memory of the special symbol is stored, the transition of the special fluctuation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table C (second special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation after the end of the big hit game (the first variation of the second special symbol after the first hit) is a long variation (variation time is 120 seconds).

In the figure (B), an example of the transition of the special fluctuation pattern when the game is played without following the firing direction is shown.
For example, when four memories of the first special symbol are accumulated before the first hit, and the left hit is continued even though the time is shortened after the big hit game is finished, that is, the first hit. When all the memories of the special symbol are digested and the time reduction state ends (punctures) by continuing to accumulate the memory of the first special symbol, the transition of the special variation table is as follows.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "1st to 4th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 1st to 4th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "fifth variation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the fifth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) can be executed (first time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "6th to 9th fluctuations", the "variation pattern table C (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the 6th to 9th fluctuations after the end of the big hit game are short fluctuations (variation time is 1.0 second) for digesting the remaining memory of the first special symbol after the first hit. .. In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, the effect pattern can be changed at high speed. In this case, the reach effect is not executed.

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "10th fluctuation", the "variation pattern table G (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special fluctuation table".
Specifically, the tenth variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a long variation (variation time is 13.5 seconds). In the liquid crystal display 42, for example, it is possible to execute an effect of urging the variable start winning device 28 (electric chew) to win a game ball (effect of urging right-handed hitting) (second time).

When the "number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game" is the "11th variation", the "variation pattern table A (first special symbol)" is selected as the "special variation table".
Specifically, the eleventh variation of the first special symbol after the first hit is a variation based on the variation pattern included in the variation pattern table A. After the end of working hours (puncture), the state shifts to the normal state (non-time reduction state, normal mode).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, if the second special symbol is stored (if the storage state of the lottery element is a special state), the non-time shortened state (normal state) and the time shortened state (advantageous). Since it is possible to execute a drive mode effect (common effect) with common contents in the state), even if the game state shifts from the time-reduced state to the non-time-reduced state, the time-reduced state is displayed for the player. It can give the impression that it is continuing. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the drive mode effect (common effect) is executed or the animal mode effect (non-common effect) is executed depending on the state of memory. Therefore, it is desired to execute the drive mode effect. It is possible to give a motivation to the player who is playing to save the memory. As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

(3) In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which only one memory of the second special symbol can be stored in the time-reduced state. Then, the memory of the second special symbol becomes a small hit or more (small hit or big hit). Therefore, when shifting from the time shortened state to the non-time shortened state, there is only one fluctuation that digests the memory of the second special symbol, and the mode (stage) on the production at this time is the same as the time shortened state. Naru (drive mode production).

〔problem〕
During the transition to the time reduction state, the section is for storing the memory of the second special symbol, and if the memory of the second special symbol cannot be stored in this section, the gaming state of the main control device is as follows. Although it is the memory digestion section of the second special symbol, since the memory of the second special symbol cannot be digested, if the mode on the production is selected one-to-one with the game state, the production cannot be established.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the gaming state of the main control device but also the information related to the memory (holding information) is taken into consideration, so that the state transition without a sense of incongruity is realized even at the time of irregularity.
Specifically, when the opening command of the small hit or the opening command of the big hit is received in the time shortened state, the subsequent development is branched depending on whether or not the memory of the second special symbol exists. More specifically, when there is a memory of the second special symbol, the big role effect of the continuation of the consecutive villas (the big hit effect including the fireworks effect) is executed, and the mode is shifted to the drive mode (the consecutive villa state mode). On the other hand, when there is no memory of the second special symbol, the big role effect of the end of the consecutive villa (the big hit effect not including the fireworks effect) is executed, and the mode is shifted to the animal mode (the end mode of the consecutive villa). When the memory of the second special symbol occurs after receiving the opening command, the change of the second special symbol in the memory digestion section is started after the transition to the animal mode (the end mode of the consecutive villas) (in the animal mode). Small hits or big hits occur).

By adopting such control contents, it is possible to shift the mode (stage) by taking into account not only the game state of the main control device but also the number of memories, and the special consecutive villa specification of the present embodiment can be played. Can be communicated to people in an easy-to-understand manner.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of the effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of the above-mentioned effect.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, but the present invention may be applied to a so-called type 1 gaming machine (a gaming machine not provided with a specific area).
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a probability fluctuation function, and in this case, it can also be applied to a so-called loop type gaming machine (a type in which a substantially upper limit is not set for the number of probability variations). It can also be applied to ST type (a type that sets a substantial upper limit on the number of probability changes) gaming machines.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, or can be applied to a gaming machine having no probability variation region.
Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that does not adopt "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol", and can also be applied to a gaming machine that adopts simultaneous rotation. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the example of the gaming machine including the drum unit 200 has been described, but the gaming machine may not have the drum unit 200.
Further, the drum unit 200 may be changed to a 7-segment display (for example, a device provided with a plurality of 7-segment displays, a 7-segment display for displaying an effect symbol), or may be changed to a liquid crystal display.

The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine with settings.
The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine equipped with a performance display monitor.

In the above-described embodiment, the state in which the second special symbol is stored is regarded as a special state, the state in which the second special symbol is not stored is not a special state, but the state in which the second special symbol is not stored is special. The state in which the memory of the second special symbol is present may not be a special state.

In the above-described embodiment, the state in which the second special symbol is stored is regarded as a special state, and the state in which the second special symbol is not stored is not a special state. A certain state may be a special state, and a state in which the memory of the second special symbol is less than the specified number may not be a special state.

In the above-described embodiment, the state in which the second special symbol is stored is regarded as a special state, and the state in which the second special symbol is not stored is not a special state, but the state in which the first special symbol is stored is special. The state in which there is no memory of the first special symbol may not be a special state. Further, the state in which the memory of the first special symbol is equal to or more than the specified number may be regarded as a special state, and the state in which the storage of the first special symbol is less than the specified number may not be a special state. Further, a special state is defined as a state in which the total memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is equal to or more than the specified number, and a state in which the total memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is less than the specified number is special. It does not have to be in such a state.

The above-described embodiment can be modified as follows.
(1) The variation pattern selection table of the second special symbol may be different depending on whether or not the first special symbol is stored.
For example, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined when the first special symbol is stored, the variation pattern selection table capable of selecting the variation pattern for a long time (several tens of seconds to several minutes) is referred to. ..
On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is not stored, the variation pattern selection table capable of selecting the variation pattern for a short time (several seconds) is referred to.

(2) A state (left-handed state) in which the memory of the first special symbol is accumulated may be generated during the consecutive villas (time reduction state, drive mode).
For example, the ending time of the jackpot is left-handed. That is, from the opening of the big hit game to the end of the final round, the player is in a right-handed state, and is in a left-handed state only during the ending of the big hit game.
In addition, during the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation (from the start to the end of the stop display time), the player is in a left-handed state. The time shortening state can be turned off at the start of the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation, whereby the non-time shortening state is set during the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation.
Furthermore, "Big hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) ≒ Outlier fluctuation confirmation time (about 1 second, 0.5 seconds to several seconds) <Small hit fluctuation confirmation time (about 15 seconds, number) About 10 seconds) ”. In this case, since the fixed time of the small hit fluctuation is longer than that of the big hit or the miss, it is possible to secure a long time for the non-time shortened state.

(3) The definition of "left-handed state" or "right-handed state" can be as follows.
The main controller has an area for storing the left-handed state or the right-handed state (for example, an area for storing the launch position designation flag), and if the stored content is a value (0) indicating left-handed, "left-handed". It is a "state", and if the content of the memory is not a value indicating a left-handed state, it is a "right-handed state". The "left-handed state" is a non-time shortened state (a state in which electric chew support is not performed) or the ending of a big hit game. The other states are "right-handed states".

The main control device sends a command to convey the state of the current launch position to the effect control device depending on whether it is in the left-handed state or the right-handed state. Such a command may send a command indicating the left-handed state at "when the power is turned on" and "when switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state", and the left-handed state is periodically performed during the left-handed state. You may send the command of.

In the left-handed state, the effect control device can turn off the right-handed notification lamp based on the command from the main control device. Further, in the left-handed state, the effect control device can hide the right-handed instruction display displayed on the liquid crystal display. Further, in the left-handed state, when the effect control device detects the passage of the game ball by the sensor in the right-handed area (gate switch 76 of the starting gate 20 or the like), the effect of prompting the left-handed, for example, "left-handed". "Please return to" and audio output can be executed. However, after the time reduction state is completed, it is possible to prevent such an effect from being executed until a predetermined number of fluctuations are made in consideration of the remaining balls on the board (that is, the predetermined number of fluctuations are performed). Until then, the right-handed notification lamp and the launch position designation display lamp are turned off, the right-handed instruction display (guidance information prompting "right-handed") is hidden, and the execution of the effect of prompting left-handed is restricted. ).

By putting the left-handed state during the ending of the big hit or during the small hit fluctuation confirmation time, the memory of the first special symbol can be stored regularly, and the change of the second special symbol in the consecutive villa can be stored. Can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from diminishing due to the end of the consecutive villa state in an extremely short time. On the other hand, if the player does not hit the left side during the consecutive villa, the fluctuation of the second special symbol will be short, so that the player can quickly digest the consecutive villa state.

Since the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine having a game property of a 1-type and 2-type mixing machine, a winning while the variable start winning device 28 (ordinary electric accessory) is open in a non-time shortened state is an error. It may be determined and an error notification may be performed.

The above-described embodiment can be modified as follows.
(1) External information If you have an external information signal (for example, "big hit 4" out of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" is the signal) that is output during the big hit and short time, the following control The content can be applied.
(A) If the number of stored second special symbols is 0 when shifting from the "big hit game state" to the "normal state", the signal output of "big hit 4" is turned on after the ending time of the big hit game has elapsed. May be turned off.
(B) If the number of stored second special symbols is 1 or more when shifting from the "big hit game state" to the "normal state", the signal output of "big hit 4" is output even after the ending time of the big hit game has elapsed. May be kept ON. In addition, if the memory of the 2nd special symbol contains a loss fluctuation (a lottery element that is not won), the signal output of "big hit 4" is maintained until the loss fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol is exhausted, and the second special symbol is stored. 2 The signal output of "big hit 4" may be turned off after the loss fluctuation of the special symbol is digested (after the fluctuation is completed).

(2) Special variation In the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern table E (no time reduction) has been described with an example in which a variation time of 120 seconds is set in the case of the second special symbol. The first special symbol may also be controlled so that a long-term fluctuation pattern is selected (for example, the fluctuation time may be 320 seconds or more, or the fluctuation time may be about 100 seconds or more).
Fluctuation pattern For the fluctuation pattern selected in the table B (no time reduction, immediate stop prevention section), the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (variation time of about several seconds) such as 13 seconds or 6 seconds in the case of the first special symbol. May be selected.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the first state is a normal state and the second state is described as an example of a time shortening state, but depending on the gaming machine (model configuration), the first state and the second state may be different. It may be another state, for example, the first state may be a latent state (high probability non-time reduction state), the second state may be a time reduction state (low probability time reduction state), and the first state may be. The state may be a time-reduced state and the second state may be a latent state.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the example of executing the common effect when there is a memory of the second special symbol has been described, but depending on the gaming machine (model configuration), the information of the memory of the second special symbol is specific. The common effect is executed on the condition that it is information (predetermined big hit, predetermined small hit, etc.), and the information in the memory of the second special symbol is not specific information (predetermined loss, first. 2 The common effect may not be executed on the condition that all the memories of the special symbols are out of order, etc.).

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the example of executing the common effect when the second special symbol is stored has been described, but depending on the gaming machine (model configuration), it is common when the second special symbol is not stored. The effect may be executed and the common effect may not be executed when the second special symbol is memorized.

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately modified.

FIG. 79 is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. Further, FIG. 80 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. In the following description, basically, the same description as that of the above-described embodiment is omitted, but there are some parts that are duplicated. Further, with respect to the reference numerals in the drawings, there are parts having the same reference numerals as those in the above-described embodiment and parts having different reference numerals. The major difference between the above-described embodiment and the other embodiment is that the decorative unit is attached to the front upper part of the pachinko machine of the other embodiment. It should be noted that the above-described embodiment can be combined with other embodiments. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine of another embodiment will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

Here, in the present specification, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated facing the pachinko machine 1, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the top side when viewed from the player. The explanation is that the lower side is the bottom when viewed from the person, the front side is the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is the rear side when viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. With the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof makes it impossible to open the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the locking tool. ..

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (a game area on which the game ball flows down, a board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the example of the model connected to the card unit is described, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can push the lower plate ball removing lever 6e backward to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration in the game area 8a will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in a glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (notice effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

Further, around the push button 64, a ring-shaped portion 65 is installed so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times higher than in the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside thereof. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Decorative unit]
A decorative unit 800 is attached to the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined mounting member (mechanical mechanism such as a screw or a hook). The decorative unit 800 may be non-removable from the pachinko machine 1.
The decorative unit 800 (decorative object) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decorative unit 800 is a cube-shaped member on which predetermined character information is displayed, and the LED (for example, the left top lens unit 47 or the glass frame top lamp 46) arranged in the rear integrated door unit 4 emits light. It emits light.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 80, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power supply control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the payout device unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the payout control board unit 176, and the back cover Unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for a setting key. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing a RAM (RWM) installed in the main controller, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to the setting related to the game of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 81 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 of another embodiment alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game). It is a second gaming area (right-handed area R, specific area) used in a state, a small hit game state, a low probability time shortening state, a high probability time shortening state, etc.). The left side portion of the gaming area 8a is also used in the high probability non-time shortening state (advantageous gaming state). Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged on the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. There is.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during open operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (perform a so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It is possible to enter a ball into the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b catches the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the conditions of the 5th round, or the 7th to 10th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) are satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generation means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged below the variable starting winning device 28 (upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to win the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). be. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b. The game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30b passes through the first count switch 84, and after the winning is detected, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the collection passage (without reference numeral).

The second variable winning device 31 is said to be a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode). It operates when the condition) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged below the first variable winning device 30 (lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends to the lower left from the second large winning opening 31b, and branches into two at the end.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability change region and a hole 31e for the probability change region are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge region) is arranged on the lower left side of the 31c.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is ON, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted deeper than the board surface, and the game ball. Is led to the hole 31e for the probabilistic region. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is turned off, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, so that the game is played. The sphere passes through the upper part of the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probabilistic region is a region in which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the vane member 31d for the probabilistic region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area where the game ball can pass.

The probabilistic region blade member 31d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region is such that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long period of time. One of a long opening pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds) and a short opening pattern that opens a short opening for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. .. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probabilistic region blade member 31d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 31d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 31d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region The opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the probability change region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability change region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

The effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration imitating the shape of a spade). The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. .. A blade member that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, and a distribution device that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the exit of the ball guide passage 40d (a game ball at the middle start winning opening 26). A device for sorting whether or not to induce a solenoid) may be arranged.

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
FIG. 82 is a schematic view showing a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 79. FIG. 82 shows a cross section cut along a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end (top, upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)) of the game area 8a. The cross section shown in FIG. 82 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the lower end of the game ball X (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guidance passage 500) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. is doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position shown by the alternate long and short dash line Y in FIG. 82).

Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the center of the game ball X in a state of being located at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the protrusion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in that state. More specifically, the lower end of the protruding portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in the state. Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500.

As is clear from the above, the decorative unit 800 overlaps with the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , It is designed to cover the entire game ball X in the state. Further, in the decorative unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a) is in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). The game ball X is not overlapped with at least the lower half of the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a, and does not cover at least the lower half of the game ball in the state. Further, the rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854. Therefore, even when the game ball is located at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily see the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in the state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically, the player's eye point, without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. The player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when sitting on a chair and playing a game. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a part of the game ball in the state without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. It is good to be able to see (lower half). That is, the decorative unit 800 is on a straight line from a predetermined point where the distance from the glass unit G is less than 50 to 90 cm to the game ball X (the portion below the center of the game ball X) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. It is good that it does not take.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. 82. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8) are provided at the upper part. It is a gaming machine.
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) At the upper part of the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right-handed area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (outer peripheral surface 502, upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral surface 504, lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(7) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can.
Further, when the game ball is strongly launched (game ball passage) by making the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 smaller than the diameter of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way. When the game ball rolls along the upper surface of the above), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the part located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the part on the right side of the point B, the part on the left side of the point B, and the part that becomes the point B). ) Is the second reference line L2.
(11) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect with the second reference line L2), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(12) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect, the part where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 intersect with the design portion), the design. The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2 and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can. Further, when the game ball is launched weakly by making the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design part D1 equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way (game ball passage). When the game ball rolls along the lower surface of the game ball), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure.

[Arrangement of positioning holes on the outer rail]
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing how the game ball comes into contact with the outer rail. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 83, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-shaped horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the attachment position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 used for processing the outer rail 600. The hole 602 is smaller in size than the guide portion 601.

The distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end (lower end in the figure) of the outer rail 600 is set to 2.7 mm. That is, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit.

As shown in FIG. 84, the rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game plate 8b, and the curved outer rail 600 is arranged on the curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. A plurality of protrusions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601.

As shown in FIG. 85, the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700. A protrusion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into a predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600, whereby the outer rail 600 is positioned on the rail base 700. Here, the protrusion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X.

As shown in FIG. 86, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, passes from the start end (PS) of the outer rail 600 on the lower left, passes through the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 on the left side, and is on the upper side. It is curved so as to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 on the upper right.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area, and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has a predetermined guide portion 601 for guiding the mounting position to the game board (holes (many) for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for mounting the positioning pins, and cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701). Are formed in plurality. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a hole 602 used when processing the outer rail 600.
(3) In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set. The range from the upper end (PU) to the upper end (PU) is defined as the second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is larger in the first range (H1) (for example, 3) than in the second range (H2) (for example, 2), and is in the second range (H2). There are more than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the ball launcher side where the impact received from the game ball is large and the arrangement of the outer rail 600 is particularly required to be accurate, and the outer rail 600 on the ball launcher side is displaced. And vibration can be reliably prevented.
Further, the terminal side of the outer rail 600, which receives a small impact from the game ball and has little influence on the game, has a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(6) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the third range (H3) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(7) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the first range (H1). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(8) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed at the upper apex (PU) and the left apex (PL) of the outer rail 600.

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game balls do not come into contact with each other (for example, a position avoiding a trajectory with which the game balls come into contact).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball does not easily flow in the forward direction.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are not evenly arranged at each other.

(13) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is the fourth range (H4). ), And the range from the left end (PL) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the fifth range (H5), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the fourth range (H4) (for example, 3). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the fifth range (H5) (for example, two pieces).
(14) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is the sixth range (H6). ), And the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the seventh range (H7), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the sixth range (H6) (for example, five). ) Is more than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is the eighth range (H8). ), And the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the ninth range (H9), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the ninth range (H9) (for example, one piece).
Then, by adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized and the game can be performed according to the design value.

The invention may be a combination of the invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail] and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail], and has been described in the above embodiment. The invention may be a combination of an invention having a configuration, an invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail], and an invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail]. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the trajectory of the gaming ball and playing the game as designed. Further, by stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball, it is possible to reliably secure the visibility of the game ball from the lower surface side of the decorative unit.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a 2nd special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 LCD display 45 Direction switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
200 drum unit

Claims (2)

A lottery element acquisition means for acquiring a lottery element related to a predetermined lottery, and
A lottery element storage means capable of storing the lottery element,
A lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery using the lottery element, and
A state transition means that enables transition from the first state to the second state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and
If the state of the lottery element storage means is a special state, the effect executing means that enables the common effect to be executed in the first state and the second state, and the effect executing means.
The game board that forms the game area,
Equipped with an outer rail provided on the game board,
The outer rail is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions for guiding the mounting position to the game board.
In a state where the outer rail is provided on the game board, the range from the start end to the left end of the outer rail is defined as the first range, and the range from the left end to the upper end of the outer rail is defined as the second range. If the range from the top to the end of the rail is the third range,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of the predetermined guide portions is larger in the first range than in the second range and in the second range than in the third range. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that non-common effects can be executed in the first state and the second state unless the state of the lottery element storage means is the special state.

Images